SNIPER ORB V3# 🎯 SNIPER ORB TRADING CHEAT SHEET
## Quick Reference Guide for Live Trading
---
## 📊 VISUAL IDENTIFICATION GUIDE
```
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
YOUR CHART AT A GLANCE
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
🔵 BRIGHT BLUE LINES (3px) → 5min ORB High/Low
🔷 CYAN LINES (2px) → 15min ORB High/Low
🟣 PURPLE LINES (2px) → 30min ORB High/Low (PRIMARY)
🟢 GREEN DASHED LINES (1px) → Upside targets (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
🔴 RED DASHED LINES (1px) → Downside targets (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
🟡 GOLD LINE (2px) → Anchored VWAP (9:30 AM anchor for NY, 3:00 AM for London)
📋 INFO TABLE (top-right) → Shows live ORB ranges, VWAP price, status
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
```
**KEY DIFFERENCE FROM OTHER ORB INDICATORS:**
- You see **ALL 3 ORB PERIODS SIMULTANEOUSLY** (5min, 15min, 30min)
- Targets calculated from **30min ORB ONLY** (not 5min or 15min)
- **NO BOX FILLS** - clean line-only display for sniper precision
- Auto-disappears at session end (no clutter from old sessions)
---
## 🔘 NEW FEATURE: ORB DISPLAY TOGGLES
**You now have FULL CONTROL over which ORB periods to display!**
```
In indicator settings → "ORB Display" section:
☑ Show 5min ORB → Toggle blue lines ON/OFF
☑ Show 15min ORB → Toggle cyan lines ON/OFF
☑ Show 30min ORB → Toggle purple lines ON/OFF
USE CASES:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
1. FOCUS MODE (30min only)
☐ 5min ☐ 15min ☑ 30min
→ Clean chart, just your primary trading range
→ Best for beginners or minimalist traders
2. EARLY WARNING MODE (5min + 30min)
☑ 5min ☐ 15min ☑ 30min
→ See early breaks with 5min, trade 30min confirmation
→ Reduces visual noise from 15min
3. CONFLUENCE MODE (all 3 ORBs)
☑ 5min ☑ 15min ☑ 30min
→ Maximum information, all alignment signals
→ For advanced traders seeking highest probability
4. INTRADAY SCALP MODE (5min only)
☑ 5min ☐ 15min ☐ 30min
→ Ultra-fast entries on 5min breaks
→ High-risk, high-frequency approach
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
💡 PRO TIP: Start with 30min only, then add 5min/15min as you gain experience
```
---
## 🎯 FIXED: ANCHORED VWAP (TIMESTAMP-BASED)
**The VWAP now anchors with SURGICAL PRECISION to the exact session start candle!**
```
LONDON SESSION:
• Anchors at the EXACT 3:00 AM ET candle
• Uses timestamp checking: hour == 3 AND minute == 0
• Resets every morning at London Open
NEW YORK SESSION:
• Anchors at the EXACT 9:30 AM ET candle
• Uses timestamp checking: hour == 9 AND minute == 30
• Resets every day at NY Open
WHAT THIS MEANS:
✅ VWAP starts accumulating from the first tick of the session
✅ No more "off by one bar" errors
✅ Institutional-grade VWAP anchoring
✅ Perfect alignment with your ORB start times
HOW TO VERIFY IT'S WORKING:
1. Load indicator on 1min or 5min chart
2. Find the exact 9:30 AM candle (NY) or 3:00 AM candle (London)
3. VWAP should START appearing from that exact bar
4. Not the bar before, not the bar after - THAT EXACT BAR
```
---
## ⏰ SESSION TIMING MATRIX
| Session | Start Time | 5min Complete | 15min Complete | 30min Complete | Session End |
|---------|-----------|---------------|----------------|----------------|-------------|
| **London** | 3:00 AM ET | 3:05 AM | 3:15 AM | 3:30 AM | 9:30 AM ET (disappears) |
| **New York** | 9:30 AM ET | 9:35 AM | 9:45 AM | 10:00 AM | 5:00 PM ET (disappears) |
**💡 GOLDEN RULES:**
1. **WAIT FOR 30MIN ORB TO COMPLETE** before trading targets (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
2. Use 5min and 15min ORBs as **early warning signals** only
3. All ORB lines + VWAP **auto-delete** at session end (clean chart)
---
## 🎯 THE 3-ORB SYSTEM: HOW IT WORKS
### **Hierarchical ORB Structure**
```
TIME: 9:30 AM ─────────────────────────────────> 10:00 AM ──────> 5:00 PM
↓ ↓
SESSION START 30min ORB COMPLETE
(all 3 ORBs begin forming) (targets appear)
📍 5min ORB (9:30-9:35 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: EARLY breakout signal, fastest-moving boundary
📍 15min ORB (9:30-9:45 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: MID-TERM institutional reference level
📍 30min ORB (9:30-10:00 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: PRIMARY TRADING RANGE - all targets calculated from this
🎯 TARGETS (10:00 AM onward): ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
Purpose: Profit-taking levels based on 30min range
```
**Why 3 ORBs Instead of 1?**
- **5min ORB**: Captures early institutional positioning (first 5 minutes)
- **15min ORB**: Confirms directional bias (more stable than 5min)
- **30min ORB**: Full market digestion of overnight news + opening orders
- **Confluence = Higher Win Rate**: When all 3 align, breakouts are extremely reliable
---
## 🎯 THE 5 HIGH-PROBABILITY SETUPS
### **SETUP #1: TRIPLE ORB BREAKOUT CONFLUENCE** ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
✅ Price breaks ALL 3 ORBs simultaneously:
• 5min high/low (blue line)
• 15min high/low (cyan line)
• 30min high/low (purple line)
✅ VWAP confirms direction (below price = bullish, above = bearish)
✅ Volume spike on breakout candle
ENTRY: Close of breakout candle (must close beyond ALL 3 ORBs)
STOP: Inside 30min ORB at 30m low (long) or 30m high (short)
TARGET 1: First green/red dashed line (0.5x 30m range)
TARGET 2: Second target (1x 30m range)
TARGET 3: Third target (1.5x 30m range)
WIN RATE: 75-85% | R:R = 1:2.5 minimum
NOTES: When all 3 ORBs align, institutional order flow is unanimous
```
---
### **SETUP #2: 5MIN EARLY BREAKOUT → 30MIN CONFIRMATION** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price breaks 5min ORB first (blue line crossed)
✅ 15min ORB holds initially (cyan line not crossed yet)
✅ After 30min ORB completes, price breaks 30min boundary (purple)
✅ VWAP alignment confirms direction
✅ All 3 ORBs now broken in same direction
ENTRY: When 30min ORB breaks (purple line) + 5min/15min already broken
STOP: 30min ORB opposite boundary
TARGET 1-3: Standard targets from 30min ORB
WIN RATE: 70-80% | R:R = 1:2+
NOTES: 5min gave early warning, 30min confirms institutional commitment
```
---
### **SETUP #3: FALSE 5MIN BREAKOUT → 30MIN REVERSAL** ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price breaks 5min ORB (blue line)
✅ Fails to break 15min or 30min ORBs (cyan/purple lines hold)
✅ Price reverses back inside 5min ORB
✅ Then breaks OPPOSITE side of 30min ORB (purple line)
✅ VWAP flips to confirm new direction
ENTRY: When 30min ORB breaks in OPPOSITE direction of failed 5min break
STOP: Failed 5min breakout high/low (now a liquidity grab zone)
TARGET 1-3: Standard targets
WIN RATE: 80-90% | R:R = 1:3+ (trapped traders forced to exit)
NOTES: Most profitable setup - 5min breakout was liquidity hunt
```
---
### **SETUP #4: TIGHT COMPRESSION → EXPLOSION** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ All 3 ORBs tightly overlapping (5m, 15m, 30m within 50 points on YM)
✅ Range < 0.3% of price (very tight consolidation)
✅ VWAP sitting in middle of compression
✅ 30min ORB complete, price still inside all 3
ENTRY: Simultaneous break of ALL 3 ORBs + VWAP cross
STOP: Middle of compression zone
TARGET: 2x-4x normal targets (volatility expansion)
WIN RATE: 65-75% | R:R = 1:5+ (explosive breakout)
NOTES: Low volatility → high volatility shift, institutions coiling spring
```
---
### **SETUP #5: VWAP BOUNCE WITHIN 30MIN ORB** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price stayed inside 30min ORB for 1+ hours post-formation
✅ VWAP acting as dynamic support (long) or resistance (short)
✅ Price bouncing between VWAP and 30min ORB boundaries
✅ Clear rejection candles at VWAP
ENTRY: When price bounces off VWAP toward 30min ORB boundary
• Long: VWAP bounce up toward 30m high (purple)
• Short: VWAP rejection down toward 30m low (purple)
STOP: Beyond VWAP by 20 points
TARGET: 30min ORB opposite boundary
WIN RATE: 70-80% | R:R = 1:1.5-2
NOTES: Range-bound play, NOT for breakout traders
```
---
## 🛡️ RISK MANAGEMENT RULES
### **Position Sizing by ORB Range**
```
30min ORB Range | Stop Distance | Risk $500 (1%) | YM Contracts
-----------------|------------------|-----------------|-------------
< 50 points | 50 pts | $500 ÷ $250 = | 2 contracts
50-100 points | 100 pts | $500 ÷ $500 = | 1 contract
100-150 points | 150 pts | $500 ÷ $750 = | 0.66 (use 1)
150-200 points | 200 pts | $500 ÷ $1000 = | 0.5 (use 1)
> 200 points | Don't trade | Too wide | Skip setup
Formula: Risk $ ÷ (Stop Distance × $5 per YM point) = Max Contracts
```
### **The 3-Strike Rule (MANDATORY)**
```
✅ Trade 1: Full position size (based on 30m ORB range)
❌ Stop hit → Trade 2: HALF position size
❌ Stop hit → Trade 3: QUARTER position size
❌ Stop hit → DONE FOR THE DAY (no exceptions)
```
### **Profit Taking Ladder**
```
TARGET 1 (0.5x 30m range): Take 50% off, move stop to breakeven
TARGET 2 (1.0x 30m range): Take 30% off, trail stop by 25 points
TARGET 3 (1.5x 30m range): Take 15% off, let 5% run with 50pt trail
```
---
## ⚠️ DO NOT TRADE IF...
```
🚫 30min ORB incomplete (< 10:00 AM NY / < 3:30 AM London)
🚫 30min ORB range < 40 points YM (too tight, likely chop)
🚫 30min ORB range > 250 points YM (too wide, unpredictable)
🚫 All 3 ORBs wildly divergent (5m=100pts, 15m=180pts, 30m=240pts)
🚫 Major news release within 30 minutes (wait for ORB to reform)
🚫 You've hit 3 losses in the session (3-strike rule)
🚫 You're tired, emotional, revenge trading, or distracted
🚫 Time > 12:00 PM ET (lunch, avoid until 1:00 PM)
🚫 Time > 3:00 PM ET unless Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM) momentum
```
---
## 🔍 PRE-SESSION CHECKLIST
**15 Minutes Before London (2:45 AM ET) or NY (9:15 AM ET):**
```
□ Check economic calendar (FOMC? NFP? CPI? → extra caution)
□ Review previous session's ORB ranges (context for today's volatility)
□ Load SNIPER ORB on 1min or 5min chart
□ Select correct session: "London" or "New York"
□ Verify indicator settings:
• Number of Targets: 3
• Target % of 30min Range: 50%
• Show Anchored VWAP: ON
□ Set TradingView alerts:
• 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM or 3:30 AM)
• Price crossing 30min high/low
• VWAP crosses
□ Prepare bracket orders mentally (entry, stop, 3 targets)
□ Review yesterday's P&L and lessons learned
□ Set phone to "Do Not Disturb" mode
```
---
## 🎨 INDICATOR SETTINGS GUIDE
### **Core Settings (Updated with Toggles)**
```
SESSION SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
• Active Session: "London" or "New York"
ORB DISPLAY (NEW!):
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
☑ Show 5min ORB (toggle blue lines)
☑ Show 15min ORB (toggle cyan lines)
☑ Show 30min ORB (toggle purple lines)
💡 Turn OFF any ORB to declutter your chart!
TARGET SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
• Number of Targets: 3 (default)
• Target % of 30min Range: 50% (default)
VWAP SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
☑ Show Anchored VWAP
• VWAP Color: Gold (#FFC107)
• VWAP Width: 2px
```
### **Color Customization (Optimized for Dark Charts)**
```
DEFAULT COLORS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
5min ORB: Bright Blue (#2196F3) - 3px wide
15min ORB: Cyan (#00BCD4) - 2px wide
30min ORB: Purple (#9C27B0) - 2px wide
Upside Targets: Green (#4CAF50) - 1px dashed
Downside Targets: Red (#F44336) - 1px dashed
VWAP: Gold (#FFC107) - 2px solid
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
WHY THESE COLORS?
• Blue family (5m/15m) = short-term, high-frequency
• Purple (30m) = primary, institutional level
• Green/Red = universal up/down
• Gold VWAP = fair value anchor (stands out)
```
### **Settings by Trading Style**
**BEGINNER (Clean & Simple):**
```
ORB Display:
☐ Show 5min ORB
☐ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (30min only - focus mode)
Number of Targets: 2-3
Target % of 30min Range: 50%
Chart Timeframe: 5-minute
```
**SCALPER (5-15 min holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☑ Show 5min ORB (early signals)
☐ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (confirmation)
Number of Targets: 5
Target % of 30min Range: 30-40%
Label Size: Tiny
Chart Timeframe: 1-minute
```
**DAY TRADER (30-90 min holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☑ Show 5min ORB
☑ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (all 3 - confluence mode)
Number of Targets: 3
Target % of 30min Range: 50%
Label Size: Small
Chart Timeframe: 5-minute (RECOMMENDED)
```
**SWING TRADER (2-4 hour holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☐ Show 5min ORB (too noisy for swings)
☑ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB
Number of Targets: 2-3
Target % of 30min Range: 75-100%
Label Size: Normal
Chart Timeframe: 15-minute
```
---
## 📈 TIMEFRAME SELECTION GUIDE
| Your Timeframe | What You See | Best For |
|---------------|--------------|----------|
| **1-minute** | Every tick, high noise | Scalping, precision entries |
| **5-minute** | Balanced clarity | Day trading (RECOMMENDED) |
| **15-minute** | Clean structure | Swing positions |
| **30-minute** | Too compressed | Not recommended (can't see ORB form) |
**💡 PRO TIP:**
- **Primary chart: 5-minute** (for entries and monitoring)
- **Secondary chart: 1-minute** (for precise timing)
- **Never go above 15-minute** (ORBs won't form properly)
---
## 🧠 READING THE 3-ORB STRUCTURE
### **Bullish Alignment Patterns**
```
PATTERN 1: "Staircase Expansion"
5min: ━━━━ (tight, 60 pts)
15min: ━━━━━━ (wider, 90 pts)
30min: ━━━━━━━━ (widest, 120 pts)
→ Bullish expansion, expect upside breakout
PATTERN 2: "Nested Compression"
5min: ━━ (30 pts)
15min: ━━━ (35 pts)
30min: ━━━━ (40 pts)
→ All tight, explosive breakout likely
PATTERN 3: "Early Commitment"
5min: ━━━━━━ (100 pts, already broken up)
15min: ━━━━━ (80 pts, holding)
30min: ━━━━━ (110 pts, about to break)
→ 5min led the way, 30min confirmation coming
```
### **Bearish Alignment Patterns**
```
PATTERN 1: "Waterfall Setup"
5min: ━━━━ (50 pts, broke down)
15min: ━━━━━ (70 pts, broke down)
30min: ━━━━━━ (90 pts, about to break)
→ Sequential breakdown, strong bearish momentum
PATTERN 2: "Failed Highs"
5min: ━━━━━━ (upper wick rejections)
15min: ━━━━━━ (couldn't break)
30min: ━━━━━━━ (topped out)
→ All 3 rejecting highs, bearish reversal likely
```
### **Neutral/Chop Patterns (AVOID TRADING)**
```
PATTERN 1: "Wide Divergence"
5min: ━━ (30 pts)
15min: ━━━━━━━ (120 pts)
30min: ━━━━━━━━━━━ (200 pts)
→ No consensus, unpredictable, skip
PATTERN 2: "Whipsaw City"
• Price breaking 5min up, then down, then up again
• 15min and 30min not aligned
• VWAP getting crossed every 5 minutes
→ Chop day, step aside, wait for clarity
```
---
## 📊 INTEGRATION WITH YM ULTIMATE SNIPER v8.1
**The 2-System Confluence Method:**
```
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 1: SNIPER ORB → Defines "Zones That Matter" │
│ • 30min ORB = primary institutional range │
│ • VWAP = fair value anchor │
│ • Targets = profit zones │
│ • 5min/15min = early warning signals │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
↓
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 2: YM ULTIMATE SNIPER → Triggers precise entry │
│ • Wait for GOD MODE signal AT 30min ORB boundary │
│ • 6-gate filter: Score ≥9, fat body ≥70%, delta ≥70% │
│ • Candle Dominance Index (CDI) ≥7 │
│ • Intrabar pressure consistent throughout formation │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
↓
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 3: EXECUTE TRADE │
│ • ORB breakout + GOD MODE = MAXIMUM PROBABILITY │
│ • Enter ONLY when BOTH systems align │
│ • This is TRUE "sniper" trading (2-5 trades/day max) │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
```
**Confluence Scoring for Combined System:**
```
SNIPER ORB Criteria:
□ 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM+) +2 points
□ All 3 ORBs broken in same direction +2 points
□ VWAP alignment (below=bull, above=bear) +1 point
□ Volume spike on breakout candle +1 point
□ Tight 3-ORB compression (<100pt divergence) +1 point
YM ULTIMATE SNIPER Criteria:
□ GOD MODE signal at ORB boundary +3 points
□ Score ≥9.0 (tier classification) +1 point
□ Candle Dominance Index (CDI) ≥8 +1 point
TOTAL POSSIBLE: 12 points
TRADE EXECUTION RULES:
• 10-12 points = MAX SIZE (this is the holy grail setup)
• 8-9 points = FULL SIZE (high probability)
• 6-7 points = HALF SIZE (moderate probability)
• <6 points = NO TRADE (wait for better alignment)
```
---
## 💡 COMMON MISTAKES & FIXES
```
❌ MISTAKE: Trading before 30min ORB completes
✅ FIX: Wait until 10:00 AM (NY) or 3:30 AM (London), NO EXCEPTIONS
❌ MISTAKE: Ignoring 5min and 15min ORBs (only watching 30min)
✅ FIX: Use all 3 for confluence - they're your early warning system
❌ MISTAKE: Chasing breakouts 100+ points beyond 30min ORB
✅ FIX: Wait for pullback to VWAP or 30min boundary for re-entry
❌ MISTAKE: Not adjusting target % for market conditions
✅ FIX: Volatile day (ORB >200pts)? Use 75-100% targets
Calm day (ORB <80pts)? Use 30-40% targets
❌ MISTAKE: Trading when all 3 ORBs are wildly different sizes
✅ FIX: Skip the day if 5m/15m/30m diverge by >100pts - no consensus
❌ MISTAKE: Forgetting VWAP position
✅ FIX: VWAP MUST confirm bias:
• Long: price > VWAP
• Short: price < VWAP
• If VWAP contradicts, skip the trade
❌ MISTAKE: Not respecting the 3-strike rule
✅ FIX: 3 losses = DONE for the session, no rationalization
❌ MISTAKE: Trading during lunch (12:00-1:00 PM ET)
✅ FIX: Volume dies, ORBs lose relevance, false signals increase
```
---
## 🔔 ALERT SETUP (ESSENTIAL)
**TradingView Alerts You MUST Set:**
```
ALERT 1: "30min ORB Complete"
• Type: Time-based
• Trigger: 10:00 AM ET (NY) or 3:30 AM ET (London)
• Message: "🎯 30min ORB complete - targets now active"
ALERT 2: "30min ORB High Breakout"
• Type: Crossing Up
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: 30min ORB High (purple line)
• Message: "🚀 30m ORB HIGH broken - check for long setup"
ALERT 3: "30min ORB Low Breakdown"
• Type: Crossing Down
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: 30min ORB Low (purple line)
• Message: "📉 30m ORB LOW broken - check for short setup"
ALERT 4: "VWAP Cross"
• Type: Crossing
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: VWAP
• Message: "⚡ VWAP crossed - check institutional bias shift"
ALERT 5: "Target 1 Hit"
• Type: Crossing
• Value 1: High (for longs) or Low (for shorts)
• Value 2: First target line
• Message: "🎯 Target 1 hit - take 50% off, move stop to BE"
```
---
## 📱 MOBILE TRADING WORKFLOW
**TradingView Mobile App Setup:**
```
1. SAVE LAYOUT
• Chart: 5-minute timeframe
• SNIPER ORB indicator loaded
• YM Ultimate SNIPER v8.1 loaded (if using)
• Save as "SNIPER ORB - YM"
2. ENABLE NOTIFICATIONS
• Settings → Notifications → Push Alerts: ON
• All 5 alerts above configured
3. QUICK ACCESS
• Add YM futures to Watchlist: "MYM" or "YM1!"
• Pin SNIPER ORB layout to favorites
4. EXECUTION READY
• Broker app (TastyTrade, NinjaTrader, etc.) logged in
• Preset bracket orders:
- Entry: market order
- Stop: 30m ORB opposite boundary
- Targets: 3 levels (50%, 30%, 20% of position)
5. BATTERY & CONNECTIVITY
• Phone charged 100% before session
• Stable WiFi or LTE connection
• Backup power bank available
```
---
## 🎓 DAILY PERFORMANCE JOURNAL
**After Each Trading Session (MANDATORY):**
```
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
DATE: __________ SESSION: □ London □ New York
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
ORB DATA:
• 5min ORB Range: ______ points
• 15min ORB Range: ______ points
• 30min ORB Range: ______ points
• Alignment: □ Tight □ Moderate □ Wide (skip if wide)
VWAP BEHAVIOR:
• Opening position: □ Above price □ Below price □ Mixed
• Did VWAP act as support/resistance? □ Yes □ No
TRADES TAKEN:
Total Setups Identified: _____
Trades Executed: _____
Win/Loss Record: _____ W / _____ L
Win Rate: _____%
Gross P&L: $_______
Net P&L (after commissions): $_______
BEST TRADE:
• Setup: ____________________ (which of the 5 setups?)
• Entry Price: ______ Exit Price: ______
• Profit: $_______
• What went RIGHT: _________________________________
_________________________________________________
WORST TRADE:
• Setup: ____________________
• Entry Price: ______ Exit Price: ______
• Loss: $_______
• What went WRONG: _________________________________
_________________________________________________
• Lesson Learned: ___________________________________
3-STRIKE RULE STATUS:
□ No losses (great day)
□ 1 loss (still in game)
□ 2 losses (caution, half size)
□ 3 losses (stopped for day, as required)
TOMORROW'S ADJUSTMENTS:
□ _________________________________________________
□ _________________________________________________
□ _________________________________________________
EMOTIONAL STATE TODAY:
□ Calm & focused (optimal)
□ Anxious/rushed (need to work on patience)
□ Overconfident (dial back position size)
□ Fearful (review winning trades to build confidence)
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
```
---
## 🚀 YOUR FIRST LIVE TRADE WALKTHROUGH
**Step-by-Step for New York Session (Most Common):**
```
⏰ 9:15 AM ET - PREPARATION
□ Load SNIPER ORB on YM 5-minute chart
□ Select "New York" session in indicator settings
□ Verify VWAP is showing (gold line)
□ Check economic calendar (any big news at 9:30?)
□ Prepare mentally: "I will wait for 30min ORB to complete"
⏰ 9:30 AM ET - SESSION OPENS
□ Watch 3 ORBs begin forming:
• Blue lines (5min) will lock in at 9:35 AM
• Cyan lines (15min) will lock in at 9:45 AM
• Purple lines (30min) will lock in at 10:00 AM
□ Observe VWAP anchoring at 9:30 AM candle
□ DO NOT TRADE YET - just observe
⏰ 9:35 AM - 5MIN ORB COMPLETE
□ Note 5min high/low (blue lines locked)
□ Check info table: "5m Range = XX points"
□ If 5min ORB breaks early, note direction but DON'T ENTER
⏰ 9:45 AM - 15MIN ORB COMPLETE
□ Note 15min high/low (cyan lines locked)
□ Compare to 5min ORB: Aligned? Expanding?
□ Still waiting... patience pays
⏰ 10:00 AM - 30MIN ORB COMPLETE (TARGETS APPEAR!)
□ Purple lines locked (30m high/low)
□ Green/red dashed target lines appear automatically
□ Info table shows "Status: ✓ Complete"
□ NOW you can trade breakouts
⏰ 10:00 AM - 11:30 AM - TRADING WINDOW
□ Wait for price to break purple line (30m ORB high or low)
□ Confirm:
1. All 3 ORBs broken in same direction?
2. VWAP confirming (below=bullish, above=bearish)?
3. Volume spike visible?
4. YM SNIPER GOD MODE signal? (if using)
□ If all YES → ENTER TRADE:
• Market order at breakout close
• Stop at 30m ORB opposite boundary
• Targets at green/red dashed lines
⏰ TARGET MANAGEMENT
□ Price hits first target (1x) → Take 50% off, move stop to BE
□ Price hits second target (2x) → Take 30% off, trail stop
□ Price hits third target (3x) → Take 15% off, let 5% run
⏰ 12:00 PM - LUNCH (AVOID TRADING)
□ Volume dies down
□ ORBs become less relevant
□ Take a break, review morning trades
⏰ 1:00 PM - 3:00 PM - AFTERNOON SESSION
□ ORBs still valid but less reliable
□ Consider waiting for Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM)
⏰ 5:00 PM - SESSION END
□ All ORB lines disappear automatically
□ VWAP disappears automatically
□ Chart cleans itself - ready for tomorrow
□ Fill out daily journal
```
---
## 🏆 WINNING MINDSET AFFIRMATIONS
Read these BEFORE each trading session:
```
"I trade ORBs, not chaos. Structure gives me edge."
"3 high-quality trades beat 20 mediocre ones."
"The 30min ORB is my anchor. I wait for it. Every. Single. Time."
"When all 3 ORBs align, institutions are unified. I follow."
"VWAP is my institutional compass. I respect its guidance."
"3 strikes and I'm out. Discipline > Ego."
"I am a SNIPER, not a machine gunner. Precision wins."
"My edge is patience. Let the ORBs complete."
"I don't predict. I react to proven structure."
"One perfect setup is worth waiting all morning."
```
---
## 📞 TROUBLESHOOTING
**"ORB lines not showing on chart!"**
→ Check timeframe: Must be 1min-30min (not daily/weekly)
→ Verify session time: Must be during London (3AM-9:30AM) or NY (9:30AM-5PM)
→ Check indicator status: Should say "⏳ Forming" or "✓ Complete" in table
**"Targets not appearing!"**
→ 30min ORB must be complete (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
→ Check "Number of Targets" setting (must be ≥1)
→ Verify "Target % of 30min Range" is set (default 50%)
**"VWAP disappeared!"**
→ Normal behavior: VWAP auto-deletes at session end (5PM NY / 9:30AM London)
→ Toggle "Show Anchored VWAP" OFF then ON to reset
→ Check if you're viewing chart outside session hours
**"All 3 ORBs look the same!"**
→ This is actually GOOD - means tight alignment (high-probability setup)
→ If they're diverging wildly (>100pts difference), that's a skip signal
**"Info table blocking my view!"**
→ Info table is in top-right corner by default
→ Drag it to a different position (TradingView allows moving)
→ Or minimize it by clicking the small arrow
**"Colors are hard to see on my chart!"**
→ Go to indicator settings:
• "5min ORB", "15min ORB", "30min ORB" color pickers
• "Upside Targets", "Downside Targets" color pickers
• Recommended: Use contrasting colors vs your chart background
---
## 📚 ADVANCED INTEGRATION TECHNIQUES
### **Combining with Market Profile**
```
• Use Volume Profile to identify Value Area High (VAH) and Low (VAL)
• If 30min ORB aligns with VAH/VAL → extra confluence
• POC (Point of Control) acts similar to VWAP
```
### **Combining with Cumulative Delta**
```
• Check if delta is positive on 30min ORB high break (bullish confirmation)
• Negative delta on low break confirms bearish institutional flow
• Your YM SNIPER already tracks this - use together!
```
### **Combining with Options Flow**
```
• Large call buying near 30min ORB high? Institutions positioning for breakout
• Large put buying near 30min ORB low? Smart money hedging/shorting
• Tools: Unusual Whales, Cheddar Flow, OptionStrat
```
---
## 🎯 FINAL PRE-LIVE CHECKLIST
**DO NOT GO LIVE UNTIL ALL CHECKED:**
```
□ Practiced on TradingView Replay for 2+ weeks
□ Can identify all 5 setups by pattern recognition
□ Understand why targets come from 30min ORB only
□ Know difference between 5min/15min/30min roles
□ Risk management rules memorized (position sizing, 3-strike)
□ YM Ultimate SNIPER v8.1 loaded (optional but recommended)
□ All 5 TradingView alerts configured
□ Broker platform tested with demo account
□ Stop/target orders can be placed in <10 seconds
□ Daily journal template prepared
□ Emotional state: calm, patient, focused
□ Account size: Minimum $10,000 recommended
□ Understand auto-disappear behavior (ORBs delete at session end)
□ Know NOT to trade before 30min ORB complete
□ Comfortable with looking at chart and seeing 6+ lines (3 ORBs + targets)
IF ALL CHECKED → YOU'RE READY TO SNIPE! 🎯
IF ANY UNCHECKED → KEEP PRACTICING, DON'T RUSH
```
---
## 💎 THE CORE PRINCIPLE
```
╔═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╗
║ ║
║ "The ORB doesn't predict the market. ║
║ The ORB reveals where institutions are positioned. ║
║ ║
║ When you see all 3 ORBs align and break, ║
║ you're not guessing direction— ║
║ you're following the billion-dollar order flow." ║
║ ║
║ THAT'S YOUR EDGE. ║
║ ║
╚═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╝
```
**🎯 Good luck, stay patient, and happy sniping! 🎯**
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
END OF SNIPER ORB TRADING CHEAT SHEET v3.0
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
"entry" için komut dosyalarını ara
In-Range Rolling SL
In-Range Rolling SL Indicator Guide
The In-Range Rolling SL indicator is a dynamic stop-loss system designed for intraday trading that identifies squeeze conditions and trade entry opportunities based on rolling price windows.
Core Concept
The indicator analyzes the highest high and lowest low over a defined lookback period (default: 2 candles) to establish an "in-range" zone. When price stays within this range without breaking either boundary, it creates a squeeze condition—signaling potential breakout opportunities.
Trading Strategy
Wait for the Squeeze Setup
The most effective approach is to wait for the in-range stop-loss squeeze to form. This occurs when both the long SL (green line) and short SL (red line) are active simultaneously, indicated by the yellow status dot (🟡) in the indicator table. Analyze the wick high/close relationship against the in-range SL while price remains compressed—this setup identifies which side is more likely to break first.
Entry Timing and Risk Management
Long Entry: Enter when a candle closes above the in-range short SL (red line) without any wick above it. This "perfect breakout candle" confirms bullish momentum. Your entry should be around the region, with your stop-loss placed just below the top of the breakout candle's high.
Short Entry: Enter when a candle closes below the in-range long SL (green line). The stop-loss for short trades should be set 34.26 points above your entry for appropriate risk protection.
Risk-Reward Considerations
If you enter at the low of a breakout candle, expect only 8.26 points of drawdown potential. However, if you accidentally go long and your stop gets hit, you'll experience the full in-range stop-loss distance as your loss.
Advanced Techniques
Failed Breakout Trap: If a follow-up candle doesn't make a higher high after the initial breakout, consider adding a "winner" for compensation rather than holding for a trap. When your buy-stop sits on top of the breakout candle high, this isn't a valid long trade setup.
Flip Trade Opportunity: In-range stop-loss attempts to flip often provide ideal entry points. If the up candle doesn't break the previous low, this validates the long continuation.
Long Scalp Trading: A failed long scalp can be traded if you missed the initial market open down-up-down trend. With a stop-loss of 34 points and potential profit exceeding 50 points, this provides favorable risk-reward ratios.
Sustained Loss Management: Stop-loss for long positions should target 26 points maximum loss. The indicator automatically invalidates stop-losses when price violates them, keeping your chart clean for the next setup.
-------------------------
In-Range Rolling SL Indicator Guide
The In-Range Rolling SL indicator is a dynamic stop-loss system designed for intraday trading that identifies squeeze conditions and breakout opportunities based on rolling price windows.
How the Indicator Works
The indicator tracks the highest high and lowest low over your selected lookback period (default: 2 candles) to establish dynamic support and resistance levels. These levels create an "in-range" zone that adapts as new price action develops.
Visual Components
Green Line (Long SL): The rolling window's lowest low - your stop-loss level for long positions
Red Line (Short SL): The rolling window's highest high - your stop-loss level for short positions
Status Indicators:
🟡 Yellow: Squeeze condition (both SLs active)
🟢 Green: Long-only setup
🔴 Red: Short-only setup
⚪ White: Neutral (no active SLs)
The Squeeze Setup Strategy
Step 1: Wait for the Squeeze
The most effective way to use the In-Range Rolling SL is to wait for the in-range stop-loss squeeze to form. During the squeeze, both the green and red lines are active, meaning price has stayed within the rolling window without breaking either boundary. This compression phase indicates that it's "go time" to prepare your trade.
While in the squeeze, analyze the wick high/close relationship against the in-range SL levels. This analysis helps you determine which side is more likely to split when the breakout occurs.
Step 2: Identify the Perfect Breakout
Long Breakout: A perfect breakout candle should close above the in-range stop-loss high (red line) without any wick above it. This clean breakout demonstrates strong momentum and reduces the risk of a false breakout.
Short Breakout: Look for a candle that closes below the in-range SL low (green line), indicating a short-side trade is coming up.
Step 3: Entry Execution
Long Entry: Your entry should be around the region of the breakout. Position your stop-loss just below the top of the breakout candle's high. This placement protects you from failed breakouts while giving the trade room to develop.
Short Entry: Enter as the candle closes below the in-range SL low. The stop-loss for short-side trades is typically 34.26 points of potential loss based on the indicator's measurements.
Risk-Reward Analysis
Entry at Breakout Low
If you enter here at the low of the breakout candle, you're looking at only 8.26 points of drawdown potential. This represents your best-case entry scenario.
Accidental Wrong-Side Entry
However, if you accidentally go long here and your stop gets hit, you'll experience the full in-range stop-loss distance as your loss. This emphasizes the importance of waiting for clear breakout confirmation.
Long Scalp Opportunity
A failed long scalp can be traded here if you missed the market open down-up-down trend. With a stop-loss of 34 points and potential profit greater than 50 points, this setup offers a favorable risk-reward ratio of approximately 1:1.5.
Advanced Trade Management
Failed Breakout Recognition
Follow-Up Candle Validation: If a follow-up candle did not make a higher high than the breakout candle, this could be a trap. Your buy-stop on top of the breakout candle high is not a valid long trade setup in this scenario. Consider adding a "winner" for compensation rather than holding through the potential reversal.
Flip Trade Opportunities
In-range stop-loss tries to flip to the other side often provide excellent entries. If the up candle did not break the previous low, this validates the long continuation and suggests the squeeze is resolving to the upside.
Sustained Position Management
Stop-Loss Guidelines: Stop-loss for long positions should be 26 points of maximum loss. The indicator table displays the delta (Δ) showing your real-time distance to the active stop-loss, helping you manage risk dynamically.
Entry Timing: Your entry should be around the region where the breakout confirms, rather than chasing price after a large move. In order to prepare your trade, position your stop-loss on top of the breakout candle's high for long trades.
Practical Example from the Chart
Looking at the MNQ1! chart, you can see multiple squeeze formations throughout the session. The most notable sequence shows:
An initial downtrend creating a squeeze setup
A perfect breakout candle closing above the red line without upper wick
The subsequent candle validating the move
Later, a failed breakout attempt that created a short opportunity
Multiple flip attempts that provided re-entry points for scalpers
The indicator's table in the top-right continuously updates with the current SL levels, gap size, candle size, and delta values - giving you all the information needed to assess each trade's risk-reward profile in real-time.
YM Ultimate SNIPER# YM Ultimate SNIPER - Documentation & Trading Guide
## 🎯 Unified GRA + DeepFlow | YM-Optimized for Low Volatility
**TARGET: 3-7 High-Confluence Trades per Day**
> **Philosophy:** *YM's lower volatility is not a weakness—it's our edge. Predictability + precision = consistent profits.*
---
## ⚡ QUICK REFERENCE CARD
```
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ YM ULTIMATE SNIPER - QUICK REFERENCE │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 💰 YM BASICS: │
│ ═════════════ │
│ • 1 tick = 1 point = $5/contract │
│ • Typical daily range: 150-400 points │
│ • 30-40% less volatile than NQ │
│ • More institutional, less retail noise │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🎯 TIER THRESHOLDS (YM-OPTIMIZED): │
│ ══════════════════════════════════ │
│ S-TIER: 50+ pts = $250+/contract → HOLD (Institutional sweep) │
│ A-TIER: 25-49 pts = $125-245/contract → SWING (Strong momentum) │
│ B-TIER: 12-24 pts = $60-120/contract → SCALP (Quick grab) │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ⏰ SESSION WINDOWS: │
│ ═══════════════════ │
│ LDN → 3:00-5:00 AM ET (European flow) │
│ NY → 9:30-11:30 AM ET (US opening drive) │
│ PWR → 3:00-4:00 PM ET (End-of-day rebalancing) │
│ │
│ Expected Trades: 1-2 LDN | 2-3 NY | 1-2 PWR = 4-7 total │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 📊 CONFLUENCE SCORING (MAX 10 POINTS): │
│ ═══════════════════════════════════════ │
│ Tier Signal: S=3, A=2, B=1 points │
│ In Active Zone: +2 points │
│ POC Aligned: +1 point (POC at body extreme) │
│ Imbalance Support:+1 point (supporting IMB nearby) │
│ Strong Volume: +1 point (2x+ average) │
│ Strong Delta: +1 point (70%+ dominance) │
│ CVD Momentum: +1 point (CVD trending with signal) │
│ │
│ MINIMUM SCORE: 5/10 to show signal (adjustable) │
│ IDEAL SCORE: 7+/10 for highest probability │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🚨 SIGNAL TYPES: │
│ ═════════════════ │
│ S🎯 / A🎯 / B🎯 → GRA Tier Signals (Full confluence) │
│ Z🎯 → Zone Entry (At DFZ zone + delta + volume) │
│ SP → Single Print (Institutional impulse) │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ✓ ENTRY CHECKLIST: │
│ ═══════════════════ │
│ □ Signal appears (check Score ≥5) │
│ □ Session active (LDN!/NY!/PWR!) │
│ □ Table: Vol GREEN, Delta colored, Body GREEN │
│ □ CVD arrow (▲/▼) matches direction │
│ □ Note stop/target lines on chart │
│ □ Check Zone status (bonus if IN ZONE) │
│ □ Execute at signal candle close │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🎯 POSITION SIZING BY TIER: │
│ ═══════════════════════════ │
│ S-TIER (50+ pts): Full size, hold 2-5 min, target 2.5:1 R:R │
│ A-TIER (25-49): 75% size, hold 1-3 min, target 2.0:1 R:R │
│ B-TIER (12-24): 50% size, hold 30-90 sec, target 1.5:1 R:R │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ⛔ DO NOT TRADE WHEN: │
│ ════════════════════ │
│ ✗ Session shows "---" │
│ ✗ Score < 5/10 │
│ ✗ Vol shows RED (<1.8x) │
│ ✗ Delta < 62% │
│ ✗ Multiple conflicting signals │
│ ✗ Just before major news (FOMC, NFP, etc.) │
│ │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
```
---
## 📋 WHY YM? LEVERAGING LOW VOLATILITY
### The YM Advantage
Most traders avoid YM because "it doesn't move enough." This is precisely why it's perfect for precision scalping:
| Factor | NQ | YM | Advantage |
|--------|----|----|-----------|
| **Daily Range** | 300-600 pts | 150-400 pts | More predictable moves |
| **Tick Value** | $5/tick (4 ticks/pt) | $5/tick (1 tick/pt) | Simpler math |
| **Retail Noise** | High | Low | Cleaner signals |
| **Whipsaws** | Frequent | Rare | Fewer fakeouts |
| **Trend Persistence** | Short | Long | Easier holds |
| **Fill Quality** | Variable | Consistent | Better execution |
### Why 3-7 Trades is the Sweet Spot
```
YM SESSION BREAKDOWN:
════════════════════
LONDON (3-5 AM ET): 1-2 trades
├── Why: European institutions positioning for US open
├── Character: Slow build-up, clean trends
└── Best signals: Zone entries + A/B tier
NY OPEN (9:30-11:30 AM ET): 2-3 trades
├── Why: Highest volume, most institutional activity
├── Character: Initial balance formation, breakouts
└── Best signals: S/A tier, zone confluence
POWER HOUR (3-4 PM ET): 1-2 trades
├── Why: End-of-day rebalancing, MOC orders
├── Character: Mean reversion or trend acceleration
└── Best signals: Zone entries, B tier quick scalps
TOTAL: 4-7 high-quality setups per day
```
---
## 🔧 YM-SPECIFIC OPTIMIZATIONS
This unified indicator has been specifically tuned for YM's characteristics:
### Tier Thresholds
| Tier | NQ (Original) | YM (Optimized) | Rationale |
|------|---------------|----------------|-----------|
| S-Tier | 100 pts | **50 pts** | YM's daily range is ~50% of NQ |
| A-Tier | 50 pts | **25 pts** | Proportional scaling |
| B-Tier | 20 pts | **12 pts** | Still 5%+ of typical daily range |
### Filter Adjustments
| Filter | NQ Value | YM Value | Why |
|--------|----------|----------|-----|
| Volume Ratio | 1.5x | **1.8x** | Higher bar = less retail noise |
| Delta Threshold | 60% | **62%** | Tighter for cleaner signals |
| Body Ratio | 70% | **72%** | More conviction required |
| Range Multiplier | 1.3x | **1.4x** | Bigger move = real signal |
| Gap ATR% | 30% | **25%** | Smaller gaps still significant |
| Zone Age | 50 bars | **75 bars** | Zones last longer in slow market |
### Why These Changes Work
1. **Higher Volume Bar**: YM has more institutional flow. Requiring 1.8x volume ensures we're catching real moves, not retail chop.
2. **Tighter Delta**: With less noise, we can demand clearer buyer/seller dominance before entering.
3. **Longer Zone Life**: YM trends persist longer. A zone that would be stale in NQ is still viable in YM.
4. **Smaller Gap Threshold**: YM gaps are naturally smaller. 25% of ATR in YM is significant institutional activity.
---
## 📊 CONFLUENCE SCORING SYSTEM
The unified indicator uses a 10-point confluence scoring system to filter for only the highest-probability setups:
### Score Breakdown
```
CONFLUENCE SCORE CALCULATION:
═════════════════════════════
BASE POINTS (Tier):
├── S-Tier signal: +3 points
├── A-Tier signal: +2 points
└── B-Tier signal: +1 point
BONUS POINTS:
├── Inside Active Zone (DFZ): +2 points
│ └── Price within bull/bear zone = institutional level
│
├── POC Alignment: +1 point
│ └── POC at body extreme = strong conviction
│
├── Imbalance Support: +1 point
│ └── Supporting imbalance within 1 ATR
│
├── Strong Volume (2x+): +1 point
│ └── Exceptional institutional participation
│
├── Strong Delta (70%+): +1 point
│ └── Clear one-sided aggression
│
└── CVD Momentum: +1 point
└── CVD trending with signal direction
MAXIMUM POSSIBLE: 10 points
```
### Score Interpretation
| Score | Quality | Action | Expected Win Rate |
|-------|---------|--------|-------------------|
| 8-10 | 🥇 Elite | Full size, hold for target | 75-80% |
| 6-7 | 🥈 Strong | Standard size, manage actively | 65-70% |
| 5 | 🥉 Valid | Reduced size, quick scalp | 55-60% |
| <5 | ⚫ Filtered | No signal shown | N/A |
### Adjusting Minimum Score
- **Conservative (Score ≥6)**: Fewer trades, higher win rate
- **Standard (Score ≥5)**: Balanced approach, 3-7 trades/day
- **Aggressive (Score ≥4)**: More trades, requires active management
---
## 📐 SIGNAL TYPES EXPLAINED
### 1. GRA Tier Signals (S🎯, A🎯, B🎯)
These are the primary signals from the merged GRA system:
```
TIER SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Point movement meets tier threshold
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.8x average
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% (buy or sell dominance)
├── ✓ Body ≥ 72% of candle range
├── ✓ Range ≥ 1.4x average
├── ✓ Small opposite wick (<50% of body)
├── ✓ CVD confirms direction (if enabled)
├── ✓ Active session (LDN/NY/PWR)
└── ✓ Confluence Score ≥ minimum (default 5)
```
### 2. Zone Entry Signals (Z🎯)
When price enters a DeepFlow zone with confirmation:
```
ZONE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Price inside fresh/tested zone (not broken)
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% in zone direction
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.5x average
└── ✓ Active session
NOTE: Z🎯 only appears when NOT already showing tier signal
(prevents duplicate signals on same candle)
```
### 3. Single Print Markers (SP)
Mark institutional impulse candles for future S/R:
```
SINGLE PRINT REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Range ≥ 1.6x average
├── ✓ Body ≥ 72% of range
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.8x average
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% confirms direction
└── ✓ Active session
USE: Horizontal lines at high/low act as future S/R
```
---
## 🎯 TRADING STRATEGIES
### Strategy 1: Zone + Tier Confluence (Highest Probability)
```
THE ULTIMATE YM SETUP:
═══════════════════════
Setup:
1. Active DeepFlow zone exists (green box below for long)
2. Price pulls back INTO the zone
3. Tier signal fires INSIDE the zone (S🎯/A🎯)
4. Score shows 7+/10
Entry: Signal candle close
Stop: Below zone bottom (for longs)
Target: Based on tier (1.5-2.5:1 R:R)
Why It Works:
• Zone = institutional limit orders
• Tier signal = momentum confirmation
• Double confirmation = high probability
Expected Win Rate: 70-75%
```
### Strategy 2: Pure Tier Signal with POC Stop
```
SNIPER TIER TRADE:
══════════════════
Setup:
1. Tier signal appears (preferably A or S)
2. Score ≥ 5/10
3. Note POC level on signal candle
4. Red/green stop/target lines appear
Entry: Signal candle close
Stop: Beyond POC (shown on chart)
Target: Auto-calculated based on tier
Key: POC placement matters
• POC near candle bottom (longs) = STRONG
• POC in middle = weaker signal
• POC at extreme = possible exhaustion
Expected Win Rate: 60-65%
```
### Strategy 3: Zone Bounce (Continuation)
```
ZONE BOUNCE TRADE:
══════════════════
Setup:
1. Fresh zone created during session
2. Price leaves zone, moves in zone direction
3. Price returns to test zone (within 15 bars)
4. Z🎯 signal appears or rejection candle forms
Entry: At CE line (middle of zone)
Stop: Beyond zone edge
Target: Previous swing high/low
Why It Works:
• Zones represent unfilled orders
• First retest often finds support/resistance
• Lower volatility = cleaner bounces
Expected Win Rate: 55-60%
```
### Strategy 4: Single Print Scalp
```
SINGLE PRINT SCALP:
═══════════════════
Setup:
1. Single Print (SP) marker appears
2. Note the gold/purple lines at high/low
3. Wait for price to return to SP level
4. Look for rejection or tier signal at level
Entry: At SP line with confirmation
Stop: Beyond the SP line
Target: Quick 1:1 or to next structure
Why It Works:
• SP = price moved too fast, orders unfilled
• Price often returns to "fill" these levels
• YM's slower pace makes retests likely
Expected Win Rate: 55-60%
```
---
## 📊 TABLE LEGEND
| Field | Reading | Color Meaning |
|-------|---------|---------------|
| **Pts** | Current candle points | Gold/Green/Yellow = Tiered |
| **Tier** | S/A/B/X | Tier color or white |
| **Vol** | Volume ratio | 🟢 ≥1.8x, 🔴 <1.8x |
| **Delta** | Buy/Sell % | 🟢 Buy dom, 🔴 Sell dom |
| **Body** | Body % of range | 🟢 ≥72%, 🔴 <72% |
| **CVD** | Trend direction | ▲ Bullish, ▼ Bearish |
| **Sess** | Active session | 🟡 LDN!/NY!/PWR!, ⚫ --- |
| **POC** | Point of Control | 🟡 Gold price level |
| **Zone** | Zone position | 🟢 BUY⬚, 🔴 SELL⬚, ⚫ --- |
| **Zones** | Active zone count | #B/#S format |
| **Score** | Confluence score | 🟢 7+, 🟡 5-6, ⚫ <5 |
| **IMB** | Recent imbalances | Count in last 10 bars |
| **R:R** | Risk/Reward | 🟢 On signal, ⚫ No signal |
---
## ⏰ SESSION-SPECIFIC PLAYBOOKS
### London Session (3:00-5:00 AM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Slow, methodical, trend-building
VOLUME: Medium (50-70% of NY)
BEST SETUPS: Zone entries, A/B tier with zones
PLAYBOOK:
• Enter on zone retests
• Expect 15-25 pt moves
• Don't fight early direction
• Watch for pre-NY positioning
TYPICAL TRADES: 1-2
```
### NY Open (9:30-11:30 AM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Fast, volatile, high-conviction
VOLUME: Highest of day
BEST SETUPS: S/A tier, zone confluence
PLAYBOOK:
• First 15 min: Observe Initial Balance
• 9:45-10:15: Best setups form
• S-tier signals = ride the wave
• Be aggressive on high scores
TYPICAL TRADES: 2-3
```
### Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Rebalancing, MOC orders
VOLUME: Medium-high (70-80% of NY)
BEST SETUPS: B tier scalps, zone entries
PLAYBOOK:
• Watch for mean reversion setups
• Quick scalps around POC levels
• Don't hold through close
• Take profits at 1:1 R:R
TYPICAL TRADES: 1-2
```
---
## 🔧 RECOMMENDED SETTINGS
### Conservative (Fewer, Better Trades)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 6 | Only strong setups |
| Min Volume Ratio | 2.0 | Higher bar |
| Delta Threshold | 65% | Stricter dominance |
| Max Zones | 8 | Less clutter |
### Standard (Balanced)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 5 | Default |
| Min Volume Ratio | 1.8 | Default |
| Delta Threshold | 62% | Default |
| Max Zones | 12 | Default |
### Aggressive (More Opportunities)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 4 | More signals |
| Min Volume Ratio | 1.5 | Lower bar |
| Delta Threshold | 60% | Looser |
| Max Zones | 15 | More context |
---
## 🚨 ALERT SETUP
Configure these alerts in TradingView:
| Alert | Priority | Action |
|-------|----------|--------|
| 🎯 YM S-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🔴 CRITICAL | Drop everything, check immediately |
| 🎯 YM A-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🟠 HIGH | Evaluate within 15 seconds |
| 🎯 YM B-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🟡 MEDIUM | Check if available |
| 🎯 YM ZONE BUY/SELL | 🟢 STANDARD | Good context entry |
| 📦 NEW ZONE | 🔵 INFO | Mark on mental map |
| ⭐ SINGLE PRINT | 🔵 INFO | Note for future S/R |
| SESSION OPEN | ⚪ INFO | Prepare to trade |
### Alert Message Format
```
🎯 YM A-LONG | YM1! @ 42,150 | 68%B | Score: 7/10 | IN ZONE | POC: 42,125 | Stop: 42,098 | SWING
```
---
## ⚠️ COMMON MISTAKES TO AVOID
| Mistake | Why It's Bad | Solution |
|---------|-------------|----------|
| Trading outside sessions | Low volume = noise | Wait for LDN/NY/PWR |
| Ignoring score | Low scores = low probability | Require ≥5/10 |
| Fighting the zone | Zones are institutional | Trade WITH zones |
| Oversizing B-tier | Quick scalps, not holds | 50% size max |
| Holding through news | Volatility spike | Exit before FOMC, NFP |
| Chasing after signal | Entry on close only | Miss it = wait for next |
| Ignoring POC position | Middle POC = indecision | Strong = extreme POC |
---
## 📈 DAILY TRADE JOURNAL TEMPLATE
```
DATE: ___________
SESSION: □ LDN □ NY □ PWR
TRADE 1:
├── Time: _______
├── Signal: S🎯 / A🎯 / B🎯 / Z🎯
├── Score: ___/10
├── Entry: _______
├── Stop: _______
├── Target: _______
├── In Zone: □ Yes □ No
├── Result: +/- ___ pts ($_____)
└── Notes: _______________________
TRADE 2:
DAILY SUMMARY:
├── Total Trades: ___
├── Win Rate: ___%
├── Net P/L: $_____
├── Best Setup: _______
└── Improvement: _______________________
```
---
## 🏆 GOLDEN RULES FOR YM
> **"YM rewards patience. Wait for the confluence—it's worth it."**
> **"Low volatility means you can size up. One good trade beats five forced trades."**
> **"Score 7+ is your edge. Anything less is gambling."**
> **"The zone + tier combo is your bread and butter. Master it."**
> **"Leave every trade with money. YM gives you time to manage."**
---
## 📊 VISUAL GUIDE
```
PERFECT YM SNIPER SETUP:
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
│ Current Price
│
┌─────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────┐
│ BEARISH ZONE (Red) │
│- - - - - - - CE Line (Entry for shorts) - - - - - - │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
══════════════════╪══════════════════ SP High (Purple)
│
┌─────────────────────┤
│█████████████████████│ ← A🎯 LONG Signal
│█████████████████████│ Score: 8/10
│ ●──────────────────│ ← POC (Gold) near bottom = STRONG
│█████████████████████│
│█████████████████████│
└─────────────────────┤
│
══════════════════╪══════════════════ SP Low (Purple)
│
┌─────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────┐
│ BULLISH ZONE (Green) │
│- - - - - - - CE Line (Entry for longs) - - - - - - -│
│██████████████████████████████████████████████████████│
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
Stop Loss
CONFLUENCE CHECK:
✓ A-Tier signal (+2)
✓ At edge of bullish zone (+2)
✓ POC at bottom of candle (+1)
✓ Strong volume 2.3x (+1)
✓ Delta 72% buyers (+1)
✓ CVD bullish (+1)
TOTAL: 8/10 = ELITE SETUP
ACTION: Full size LONG at signal candle close
STOP: Below zone bottom
TARGET: 2:1 R:R (auto-calculated)
```
---
## 🔧 TROUBLESHOOTING
| Issue | Cause | Fix |
|-------|-------|-----|
| No signals appearing | Score too high | Lower min score to 4-5 |
| Too many signals | Score too low | Raise min score to 6+ |
| Zones cluttering chart | Max zones high | Reduce to 8-10 |
| POC not showing | Tiered filter on | Check "POC Only Tiered" |
| Session not highlighting | Wrong timezone | Verify timezone setting |
| Alerts not firing | Not configured | Set up in TradingView alerts |
---
## 📝 PINE SCRIPT V6 TECHNICAL NOTES
This indicator uses advanced features:
- **User Defined Types (UDT)**: Clean state management for zones/imbalances
- **`request.security_lower_tf()`**: Intrabar volume analysis
- **Dynamic Array Management**: Efficient memory for drawings
- **Confluence Scoring Engine**: Multi-factor signal qualification
- **Auto Stop/Target**: Dynamic risk management calculation
**Minimum TradingView Plan:** Pro (for intrabar data access)
---
*© Alexandro Disla - YM Ultimate SNIPER*
*Pine Script v6 | TradingView*
*Unified GRA v5 + DeepFlow Zones | YM-Optimized*
Inversion Fair Value Gap Model [PJ Trades]GENERAL OVERVIEW:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator is a complete rule-based system designed to identify trade setups using the Inversion Fair Value Gap strategy taught by PJ Trades. It automates the strategy’s workflow by detecting liquidity sweeps, confirming V-shape recoveries, identifying valid Inversion Fair Value Gaps, validating higher-timeframe Fair Value Gap taps, and checking for a clear opposite Draw On Liquidity. These factors are evaluated together to produce a signal rating of A, A+, or A++, based on how many of these criteria the setup satisfies. When a long or short setup is confirmed, the indicator automatically plots an entry, stop-loss, break-even, and two take-profit levels.
A dashboard that updates in real-time displays the current directional bias, liquidity sweep activity, Inversion Fair Value Gap confirmation state, V Shape Recovery state, higher-timeframe Fair Value Gap context, opposite Draw on Liquidity, SMT divergence, and other key information relevant to the trading model. The indicator also includes optional trade statistics on the dashboard that tracks the recent win rates for A, A+, and A++ setups, as well as separate long and short win rates.
This indicator was developed by Flux Charts, in collaboration with PJ Trades.
What is the theory behind the indicator?:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap model is built on the idea that when the market pushes above a high or below a low, it often does so to sweep liquidity. If that move quickly fails and price reverses, it shows the sweep was a grab for orders and not a continuation. That quick rejection is the V Shape Recovery behavior. An Inversion Fair Value Gap forms when a Fair Value Gap that once supported the original move gets invalidated afterward. That invalidation confirms the shift in direction and becomes the new reference point for trades. The Inversion Fair Value Gap model uses this sequence because it highlights when the market has taken liquidity, rejected continuation, and started delivering in the opposite direction.
INVERSION FAIR VALUE GAP MODEL FEATURES:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes 15 main features:
Sessions
Key Levels & Swing Levels
Liquidity Levels
Liquidity Sweeps
V Shape Recoveries
Higher-Timeframe Fair Value Gaps
Inversion Fair Value Gaps
Macros
Bias
Signals
New Day Opening Gap
New Week Opening Gap
SMT Divergences
Dashboard
Alerts
SESSIONS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes five trading sessions (times in EST):
Asia: 20:00 - 00:00
London: 02:00 - 05:00
NY AM: 09:30 - 12:15
NY Lunch: 12:15 - 13:30
NY PM: 13:30 - 16:00
Session highs and lows are automatically tracked and used within the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Session Zones:
Each session has a zone that outlines its active time window. These zones can be toggled on or off independently. When active, they visually separate each part of the trading day. Users can adjust the color and opacity of each session box. Users can also enable session labels, which place a label above each session zone showing its corresponding session name.
🔹Session Time:
Users can toggle on ‘Time’ which will display each session’s time window next to its session title.
🔹Session Highs/Lows:
Every session can display its own high and low as horizontal lines. Users can customize the line style for session highs/lows, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted. The color of the lines will match the same color used for the session box. Users can adjust the color of the labels as well, which is applied to all session high/low labels.
When price has moved above a session high, or below a session low, the label will not be displayed anymore.
🔹Extend Levels:
When enabled, each session’s high and low levels can be extended forward by a set number of bars.
Please Note: Disabling a session under the main Sessions section only hides its visuals (boxes, lines, or labels). It does not impact signal detection or logic.
KEY LEVELS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes 11 key market levels that outline important structural price areas across daily, weekly, and monthly timeframes. These levels include the Daily Open, Previous Day High/Low, Weekly Open, Previous Week High/Low, Monthly Open, Previous Month High/Low, Midnight Open, and 08:30 Open. The levels can be enabled or disabled and customized in color and line style. All of the levels except the Midnight Open and 08:30 Open are used for the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Daily Open
The Daily Open marks where the current trading day began.
🔹Previous Day High/Low
The Previous Day High (PDH) marks the highest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where buyers pushed price to its highest point before the market closed.
The Previous Day Low (PDL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where selling pressure reached its lowest point before buyers stepped in.
When price pushes above the PDH or below the PDL, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Weekly Open
The Weekly Open marks the first price of the current trading week.
🔹Previous Week High/Low
The Previous Week High (PWH) marks the highest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where buying pressure reached its peak before the weekly close.
The Previous Week Low (PWL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where sellers pushed price to its lowest point before buyers regained control.
When price pushes above the PWH or below the PWL, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Monthly Open
The Monthly Open marks the opening price of the current month.
🔹Previous Month High/Low
The Previous Month High (PMH) marks the highest price reached during the previous calendar month. It represents the point at which buyers achieved the strongest push before the monthly close.
The Previous Month Low (PML) marks the lowest price reached during the previous calendar month. It shows where selling pressure was strongest before buyers stepped back in.
When price pushes above the PMH or below the PML, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Midnight Open
The Midnight Open marks the first price of the trading day at 00:00 EST.
🔹08:30 Open
The 08:30 Open marks the opening price at 08:30 EST.
🔹Customization Options:
Users can fully customize the appearance of all key levels, including the following:
Labels
Label Size
Line Style
Line Colors
Labels:
Users can toggle on ‘Show Labels’ to display labels for each toggled-on level that price hasn’t pushed above/below. Users can also adjust the size of labels, choosing between auto, tiny, small, normal, large, or huge.
Line Style:
Users can select a line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted, which is applied to all toggled-on key levels.
Line Color:
Users can choose different colors for each of the following key levels:
Daily Open, Previous Day High, Previous Day Low
Weekly Open, Previous Week High, Previous Week Low,
Monthly Open, Previous Month High, Previous Month Low
Midnight Open
08:30 Open
🔹Extend Levels:
When enabled, each key level is extended forward by a set number of bars.
Please Note: Disabling a level in the “Key Levels” section only hides its visuals and does not affect the indicator’s signals.
🔹Swing Levels
The indicator automatically plots Swing Highs and Swing Lows which are used in the indicator’s signal generation logic.
A swing high forms when a candle’s high is greater than the highs of the bars immediately before and after it.
A swing low forms when a candle’s low is lower than the lows of the bars immediately before and after it.
🔹Swing Level Colors
Users can customize the color of Active Levels and Swept Levels.
Active Levels are levels that price has not pushed above or below
Swept Levels are levels that price pushed above or below.
🔹Swing Levels – Show Nearest
This setting determines how many swing highs/lows are displayed on the chart. The indicator will display the nearest X highs to price and the nearest X lows to price.
For example, if ‘Show Nearest’ is set to 2, the nearest 2 swing highs and nearest 2 swing lows to price will be plotted on the chart.
LIQUIDITY LEVELS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator automatically identifies and plots liquidity at key structural points in the market. These include swing highs and swing lows, session highs and lows, and major higher timeframe reference points as explained in the SESSIONS and KEY LEVELS sections above. All of these areas are treated as potential pools of resting orders and are used throughout the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹What is Buyside Liquidity?:
Buyside Liquidity (BSL) represents price levels where many buy stop orders are sitting, usually from traders holding short positions. When price moves into these areas, those stop-loss orders get triggered and short sellers are forced to buy back their positions. These zones often form above key highs such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding BSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the sudden wave of buy orders can create sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹What is Sellside Liquidity?:
Sellside Liquidity (SSL) represents price levels where many sell stop orders are waiting, usually from traders holding long positions. When price drops into these areas, those stop-loss orders are triggered and long traders are forced to sell their positions. These zones often form below key lows such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding SSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the surge of sell orders can cause sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹 Which Liquidity Levels Are Used
The indicator tracks liquidity at the following areas:
Asia Session High/Low
London High/Low
NY AM High/Low
NY Lunch High/Low
NY PM High/Low
Previous Day High and Low
Previous Week High and Low
Previous Month High and Low
Daily Open
Weekly Open
Monthly Open
Swing Highs/Lows
🔹 How Liquidity Levels Are Used
All tracked levels across sessions, swing points, and higher timeframes serve as potential liquidity targets. When price trades above one of these highs, the indicator looks for short setups if other confluences align. When price trades below lows, the indicator looks for long setups if other confluences align.
LIQUIDITY SWEEPS:
The indicator automatically detects Buyside Liquidity and Sellside Liquidity sweeps using the liquidity levels mentioned in the previous section.
🔹What is a Liquidity Sweep?
Liquidity sweeps occur when price trades beyond a key high or low and activates resting buy-stop or sell-stop orders in that area. It’s how the market gathers the liquidity needed for larger participants to enter positions.
Traders often place stop-loss orders around obvious highs and lows, such as the previous day’s, week’s, or month’s levels. When price pushes through one of these areas, it triggers the stops placed there and generates a burst of volume. This can lead to quick movements in price as those orders are executed.
🔹Sellside Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips below a Sellside Liquidity (SSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by long traders below that low. When this happens, the indicator records the sweep and begins monitoring for potential long setups as the next step in the IFVG trading strategy. Long trades are only eligible after a SSL sweep.
🔹Buyside Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips above a Buyside Liquidity (BSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by short seller traders above that high. When this happens, the indicator records the sweep and begins monitoring for potential short setups as the next step in the trading strategy. Short trades are only eligible after a BSL sweep.
🔹How to Use Liquidity Sweeps
Liquidity sweeps are not direct trade signals. They are best used as context when forming a directional bias. A sweep shows that the market has removed liquidity from one side, which can hint at where the next move may develop.
For example:
When BSL is swept, it often signals that buy stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move lower. Traders may then begin looking for short opportunities.
When SSL is swept, it often signals that sell stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move higher. Traders may then begin looking for long opportunities.
V SHAPE RECOVERIES:
🔹 What Is a V Shape Recovery?
A V shape recovery is a sharp, immediate reversal that happens right after price sweeps BSL or SSL. It indicates that price quickly moved back in the opposite direction after trading through the level. This behavior signals a shift in momentum and is a required confirmation in the indicator for signal generation. The indicator will not look for long trades after a SSL sweep unless a V shape recovery occurs. It will not look for short trades after a BSL sweep unless a V shape recovery occurs. Without this behavior, the indicator assumes that price may still be delivering in the direction of the sweep, so no valid setups can form.
🔹 Why V Shape Recoveries Matter
V shape recoveries help confirm that the liquidity the sweep did not immediately continue in the same direction. They separate false breaks from true continuation. A sweep without recovery often means price may keep trending, so the indicator does not generate signals in those cases. A sweep with a V shape recovery confirms rejection and sets the foundation for valid Inversion Fair Value Gap formation. This makes the V shape recovery one of the most important sequence steps in the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model.
🔹 How the Indicator Detects V Shape Recoveries
V shape recoveries can be visually intuitive when looking at a chart, but they are difficult to define consistently programmatically. To ensure reliable and repeatable detection, the indicator uses a rules-based method that evaluates candle size, candle direction, and the strength of the move immediately following the liquidity sweep. This approach removes subjectivity and allows the indicator to confirm V shape behavior the same way every time.
The indicator does not plot any visual elements specifically for V shape recoveries. Instead, the presence of a V shape recovery is implied through the signals themselves. Every valid long or short signal that appears after a liquidity sweep requires a confirmed V shape recovery. This means that if a signal is generated following a sweep, a V shape recovery has occurred.
🔹 V Shape Recovery After a Sellside Sweep (SSL Sweep)
After price trades below a sellside liquidity level, long positions are liquidated. If buyers quickly step in and force price upward with strong momentum, this forms a V shape recovery. This signals that the sweep below the low was rejected and that buyers have reclaimed control. When this occurs, the indicator begins monitoring for long setups.
🔹 V Shape Recovery After a Buyside Sweep (BSL Sweep)
After price pushes above a buyside liquidity level, many short positions are stopped out. If sellers immediately step in and drive price back down with strong movement, this forms a V shape recovery. This behavior reflects a quick change in candle direction immediately following the sweep. When this occurs, the indicator begins monitoring for short setups.
🔹Failed V Shape Recoveries
These examples show failed V shape recoveries, where price did not reverse decisively after the BSL or SSL sweep. The lack of strong response from buyers or sellers indicates that momentum did not shift. Thus, the indicator will not detect valid long/short setups using these liquidity sweeps.
HIGHER-TIMEFRAME FAIR VALUE GAPS:
Higher-timeframe Fair Value Gaps (HTF FVGs) provide important context in the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model because they show where significant imbalance occurred on larger market structures. The indicator automatically detects HTF FVGs and uses them as part of the signal rating system.
🔹 What Is a Fair Value Gap?
A Fair Value Gap (FVG) is an area where the market’s perception of fair value suddenly changes. On your chart, it appears as a three-candle pattern: a large candle in the middle, with smaller candles on each side that don’t fully overlap it.
A bullish FVG forms when a bullish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
A bearish FVG forms when a bearish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
This creates an imbalance because price moved so quickly that one side of the auction did not trade.
Examples:
🔹 What Makes an FVG “Higher-Timeframe”?
In this indicator, HTF FVGs are Fair Value Gaps detected on timeframes higher than the chart’s current timeframe. For example, on a 5-minute chart, a 1-hour FVG would be considered a HTF FVG. The indicator automatically plots and checks whether price interacts with these HTF FVGs during a liquidity sweep and incorporates this into the signal rating (A, A+, A++).
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Higher-Timeframe FVGs
The indicator automatically scans up to three user-selected higher timeframes for valid bullish and bearish FVGs and tracks price’s behavior around them in the background. When any of these higher timeframes are enabled, their FVGs are used directly within the signal logic.
During a liquidity sweep, the indicator checks whether price taps into any enabled HTF FVG. A tap occurs when price trades inside the boundaries of a higher-timeframe FVG during or immediately after the sweep.
A bullish HTF FVG tap during a sellside sweep supports a long setup.
A bearish HTF FVG tap during a buyside sweep supports a short setup.
When an HTF FVG tap aligns with the direction of the setup, the signal’s rating is increased. This can increase a setup’s rating from A to A+ or from A+ to A++.
🔹 Higher-Timeframe FVG Customization
Users can select up to three higher timeframes for HTF FVG detection. When a higher timeframe is enabled, its FVGs are used in the model’s signal logic. Users can also choose whether to display these HTF FVGs visually on the chart, by enabling the ‘Plot HTF FVGs’ setting.
Each enabled HTF FVG can be customized with the following options:
Bullish and Bearish Colors: Users can set different fill colors for bullish and bearish HTF FVGs for each selected timeframe.
Midline: When enabled, a midline is drawn through the center of each HTF FVG. Users can customize the midline’s line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted and also customize the midline’s color.
Labels: When enabled, each plotted HTF FVG displays a label that shows its originating timeframe (for example, 1H, 4H).
Plot HTF FVGs: When disabled, the HTF FVG zones are hidden from the chart while the logic remains active in the background for signals.
Show Nearest:
This setting controls how many HTF FVGs are displayed based on proximity to current price. Users can choose to show the nearest X bullish HTF FVGs and the nearest X bearish HTF FVGs. This filter is applied across all enabled higher timeframes and does not limit by timeframe individually.
🔹When are Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gaps mitigated?
A Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gap is considered mitigated when a candle from the chart’s timeframe closes above the gap for a bearish FVG or below the gap for a bullish FVG.
INVERSION FAIR VALUE GAPS:
Inversion Fair Value Gaps (IFVGs) are a core requirement of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model. Every long and short signal generated by the indicator requires a valid IFVG, just like liquidity sweeps and V shape recoveries. Without a confirmed IFVG, the model will not produce a setup.
🔹 What Is an Inversion Fair Value Gap?
An Inversion Fair Value Gap is a Fair Value Gap that becomes invalidated by a candle close in the opposite direction. This “flip” confirms that the original imbalance failed and that the market has shifted.
A bullish IFVG forms when a bearish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing above it.
A bearish IFVG forms when a bullish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing below it.
In the indicator, IFVGs are not used as retracement areas. Signals are generated immediately when a valid IFVG forms, not after price returns to the gap. The IFVG itself is the confirmation event that finalizes a setup sequence after a liquidity sweep and V shape recovery.
🔹 How the Indicator Plots IFVGs
The indicator only plots IFVGs that are used in long or short setups. Not every possible IFVG is shown on the chart. Only the IFVG involved in a confirmed signal is displayed. Users can disable IFVG plots entirely if they prefer a minimal view. This hides the visual gaps but does not affect the signal logic.
🔹 Customization Options
Users can customize how IFVGs appear on the chart:
Color Settings: Choose separate fill colors for bullish IFVGs and bearish IFVGs.
Midline: Toggle an optional midline inside the IFVG and choose between a solid, dashed, or dotted line.
Midline Color: Adjust the color of the IFVG Midline.
MACROS:
Macros are short, predefined time windows, where price is more likely to seek liquidity or rebalance imbalances. These periods often create sharp movements or shifts in delivery, giving additional context to setups. In the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model, macros are used as a confluence factor. When a long or short signal forms during a macro time window, the setup’s rating can increase from A to A+ or from A+ to A++.
Macros are not required for a signal to form, but they increase the signal’s rating when the setup aligns with macro timing.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Macros
The indicator allows users to enable up to five macros. Each macro has its own start and end time, which the user can customize. These time windows are used directly in the signal logic. If a valid IFVG setup forms while price is inside any of the enabled macro windows, the indicator increases the signal’s rating.
Users may visually disable macros on the chart without affecting signal logic. Disabling visuals hides the macro zones, labels, and lines, but the underlying macro logic continues to function in the background for signals.
The indicator’s default macros use the following time periods (in EST):
09:50 - 10:10
10:50 - 11:10
11:50 - 12:10
12:50 - 13:10
13:50 - 14:10
🔹 Macro Settings
Each macro displays a shaded zone representing the active time window. This zone can be toggled on or off. Users can customize:
The color of each macro zone
The opacity of each zone
Whether the zones display at all (‘Show Zones’)
These visuals help identify whether price is currently inside a macro window.
🔹 Macro Labels:
Users can enable macro labels, which place a text label showing the macro’s title and its time window. The label color is global (applies to all macros), and the label size can be adjusted. Individual macros cannot have unique label colors.
🔹 Macro Start/End Lines
For additional clarity, the indicator draws two vertical markers for each macro:
One at the start of the macro
One at the end of the macro
A horizontal macro line is then drawn between the highs of these two candles to highlight the full duration of the macro window. Users can customize:
The line styles (solid, dashed, dotted) of the Macro Line and Start/End Lines
BIAS:
Bias determines which direction the indicator is allowed to generate signals. A bullish bias means only long setups can be confirmed. A bearish bias means only short setups can be confirmed. The bias acts as the final directional filter after a liquidity sweep, V shape recovery, and IFVG have all been validated. Even if all model conditions are met, the indicator will only confirm the setup if the direction aligns with the active bias.
Users are able to manually set a bias or use an automatic bias filter, which is explained below.
🔹 Manual Bias
Users can manually choose the directional bias at any time and choose between Bullish, Bearish, or Both.
When set to Bullish, the indicator will only confirm long setups, regardless of market structure.
When set to Bearish, only short setups are allowed.
When set to Both, the indicator can confirm both long and short setups if all requirements are met.
🔹 Automatic Bias
Automatic bias is fully rules-based and determined by how the previous session interacted with major draw-on-liquidity (DOL) levels. These levels include 1-hour highs and lows, 4-hour highs and lows, previous session highs and lows (such as Asia or London), and the previous day’s high and low. The indicator evaluates whether the previous session consolidated, manipulated liquidity, or manipulated and reversed before closing. Based on this behavior, the indicator establishes a directional bias for the current session.
◇ Previous Session Consolidation:
If the previous session did not sweep any major liquidity levels and price remained inside its range, the session is classified as consolidation.
After the current session sweeps a key low, the bias becomes bullish.
After the current session sweeps a key high, the bias becomes bearish.
The bias is determined live based on which side the current session manipulates first.
◇ Previous Session Manipulation (No Reversal):
If the previous session swept a major high-timeframe level but did not reverse before the session closed, the model assigns a reversal-based bias at the start of the current session.
If the previous session swept a low, the current session bias is bullish.
If the previous session swept a high, the current session bias is bearish.
Here, bias is determined immediately because the previous session’s manipulation defines the directional framework for the current session.
◇ Previous Session Manipulation + Reversal:
If the previous session swept a DOL level and also reversed away from it within the same session, the model assigns a continuation-based bias at the start of the current session.
If the previous session swept a low and reversed upward, the bias for the current session is bullish.
If the previous session swept a high and reversed downward, the bias is bearish.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Bias in Practice
After the indicator validates the liquidity sweep, V shape recovery, and IFVG, it checks the active bias before confirming a signal.
If bias is bullish, only long setups are allowed.
If bias is bearish, only short setups are allowed.
If bias is Both, setups of either direction may form.
The bias does not influence the detection of liquidity sweeps, V shape recoveries, or IFVGs. It only determines whether those validated components are allowed to produce a final signal. Automatic bias updates based on session behavior, while manual bias remains fixed until the user changes it.
SIGNALS:
Signals are the final output of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator. A signal is only generated when all model conditions are satisfied in a clear, rules-based sequence.
A signal consists of:
An Entry
A Stop-Loss (SL)
A Breakeven (BE) level
Two Take-Profit levels (TP1 and TP2)
These components are plotted immediately once the final requirement (the IFVG confirmation) is met and the directional filter (bias) allows the setup.
Signals can be rated A, A+, or A++, based on whether certain confluences were present during the setup’s formation.
🔹 What All Signals Have in Common
Each signal type (A, A+, A++) requires the same four mandatory conditions. If any of these four are missing, the indicator will not print a signal.
◇ Required Component #1 – Valid Directional Bias
The bias determines whether the indicator can confirm a long or short setup.
Bullish bias → only long setups allowed
Bearish bias → only short setups allowed
Both → long or short setups allowed
Automatic bias → bias determined by session-based liquidity logic explained above
◇ Required Component #2 – Liquidity Sweep
The indicator must detect one of the following:
Sellside Liquidity Sweep (SSL Sweep) for potential long setups
Buyside Liquidity Sweep (BSL Sweep) for potential short setups
◇ Required Component #3 – V Shape Recovery
After a liquidity sweep, the indicator evaluates whether price produced a valid V shape recovery.
◇ Required Component #4 – Inversion Fair Value Gap (IFVG)
An IFVG must form in the direction of the potential setup.
A bullish IFVG forms when a bearish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing above that gap
A bearish IFVG forms when a bullish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing below that gap
The IFVG must occur after the V Shape Recovery and Liquidity Sweep. The IFVG confirmation is the final structural requirement. Once it forms, the setup is considered structurally complete.
🔹 A Signals
An A-rated signal contains exactly the four required components:
Valid Bias
Liquidity Sweep
V Shape Recovery
IFVG
An A signals represent the foundational implementation of the IFVG Model.
🔹 A+ Signals
An A+ signal includes the full A-signal structure plus ONE of the following:
Higher-Timeframe FVG Tap
Multi-Liquidity Sweep
Inside a Macro Window
◇ Higher-Timeframe FVG Tap
During a liquidity sweep, the indicator checks whether price taps into any enabled HTF FVG. A tap occurs when price trades inside the boundaries of a higher-timeframe FVG during or immediately after the sweep.
A bullish HTF FVG tap during a sellside sweep supports a long setup.
A bearish HTF FVG tap during a buyside sweep supports a short setup.
◇ Multi-Liquidity Sweep
A Multi-Liquidity Sweep occurs when price sweeps two liquidity levels of the same type in the same directional push.
Sweeping two lows in one move: Multi-Sellside Liquidity Sweep (long setups).
Sweeping two highs in one move → Multi-Buyside Liquidity Sweep (short setups).
◇ Inside a Macro Window
The final IFVG confirmation must occur inside a macro time window defined by the user.
If exactly one of these additional confluences is present, the signal rating is A+.
🔹 A++ Signals (Two Additional Confluences)
An A++ signal contains the full A signal structure plus TWO of the three confluences listed above.
HTF FVG tap + Multi-Liquidity Sweep
HTF FVG tap + Inside a Macro Window
Multi-Liquidity Sweep + Inside a Macro Window
If two confluences are present, the rating becomes A++. If all three are present, the setup is still rated a A++ (there is no A+++).
🔹 Signal Plots
When a valid long/short setup is detected, a signal with its rating appears with the following:
Entry: At the close of the candle that inverted a FVG
Stop-Loss: At the nearest swing high for short setups or nearest swing low for long setups
Breakeven Level: At the nearest swing high for long setups or the nearest swing low for short setups
Take-Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high for long setups or the second nearest swing low for short setups.
Take-Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high for long setups or the third nearest swing low for short setups.
After a signal reaches either TP2 or SL, the levels for Entry, SL, BE, TP1, and TP2 are removed from the chart. If another signal appears before the prior signal reaches either TP2 or SL, the levels are also removed.
Users can hover over any signal label to view a short summary of the exact criteria that were met for that setup. This includes whether a HTF FVG tap occurred, whether a multi-liquidity sweep was detected, whether the setup formed inside a macro window, and which liquidity level was swept prior to the V shape recovery.
🔹 Long Setup – A Rating
A long A-rated setup forms when all four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur without any additional confluences. First, price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level. Immediately after the sweep, price must form a valid V shape recovery. Once the recovery completes, a bullish IFVG must form by invalidating a bearish Fair Value Gap with a candle close above it.
For a confirmed long signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that invalidates the bearish FVG and creates the IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps a swing low, has a V Shape recovery, and forms a bullish IFVG:
🔹 Short Setup – A Rating
A short A-rated setup forms when all four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur without any additional confluences. Price must first sweep a Buyside Liquidity level. Immediately after the sweep, price must form a valid V shape recovery. Once the recovery completes, a bearish IFVG must form by invalidating a bullish Fair Value Gap with a candle close below it.
For a confirmed short signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that invalidates the bullish FVG and creates the IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bearish IFVG:
🔹 Long Setup – A+ Rating
A long A+ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and exactly one additional confluence is present. Price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bullish IFVG by invalidating a bearish FVG. One of the following must also occur: a bullish HTF FVG tap during the liquidity sweep, a multi-sellside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forms inside a macro window.
For a confirmed long A+ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bullish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps the NY AM Session Low, taps a 30-minute HTF FVG during the sweep, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bullish IFVG:
🔹 Short Setup – A+ Rating
A short A+ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and exactly one additional confluence is present. Price must sweep a Buyside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bearish IFVG by invalidating a bullish FVG. One of the following must also occur: a bearish HTF FVG tap, a multi-buyside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forms inside a macro window.
For a confirmed short A+ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bearish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bearish IFVG inside of the 13:50-14:10 macro:
🔹 Long Setup – A++ Rating
A long A++ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and at least two additional confluences are present. Price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bullish IFVG. The setup must also include any two or three of the following: a bullish HTF FVG tap, a multi-sellside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forming inside a macro window.
For a confirmed long A++ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bullish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps two swing lows, has a V shape recovery, taps a bullish 30-minute HTF FVG during the liquidity sweep, and forms a bullish IFVG inside of the 10:50-11:10 macro:
🔹 Short Setup – A++ Rating
A short A++ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and at least two additional confluences are present. Price must sweep a Buyside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bearish IFVG. The setup must also include any two or three of the following: a bearish HTF FVG tap, a multi-buyside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forming inside a macro window.
For a confirmed short A++ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bearish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, taps a bearish 30-minute HTF FVG during the liquidity sweep, and forms a bearish IFVG inside of the 09:50-10:10 macro:
🔹Signal Settings
◇ Liquidity Levels Used:
Users can select which type of liquidity levels the indicator uses for identifying liquidity sweeps:
Swing Points: Only uses Swing Highs/Lows
Session Highs/Lows: Only uses Session Highs/Lows
Both: Uses both Swing Highs/Lows and Session Highs/Lows
◇ Bias:
This setting determines which signal directions are allowed.
Manual Bias: Users can manually choose the directional bias, picking between Bullish, Bearish, or Both.
Automatic Bias: The indicator automatically determines a directional bias based on the criteria mentioned in the previous Bias section.
◇ IFVG Sensitivity:
This setting determines the minimum gap size required for an FVG to qualify as an Inversion FVG.
Higher values: only larger FVGs become IFVGs
Lower values: smaller gaps are allowed
◇ Use First Presented IFVG:
This setting determines whether the indicator limits signals to only the first IFVG created within the manipulation leg.
What Is the First Presented IFVG?
It is the earliest FVG formed inside the displacement that causes the liquidity sweep.
For a bearish manipulation leg (price moving downward into the sweep), the first presented IFVG is the first FVG created at the start of that downward move:
For a bullish manipulation leg (price moving upward into the sweep), the first presented IFVG is the first FVG created at the start of that upward move:
When this setting is enabled, the indicator will only confirm signals when the IFVG used is derived from this first presented FVG. IFVGs that form later in the manipulation leg are not used for signal generation.
◇ Only Take Trades:
This setting allows users to restrict signals to a defined time window.
If a complete setup occurs inside the time window, it is allowed and plotted
If it occurs outside the window, the signal will not appear
For example, if you only wanted to see long/short signals between 9:30 AM and 12:00 PM, you would enable this setting and set the time window from 09:30 - 12:00.
◇ Minimum R:R
This setting allows users to require a minimum risk-to-reward ratio before a signal is confirmed and plotted on the chart. The risk-to-reward ratio is calculated using the distance from the Entry to the Stop-Loss (risk) and the distance from the Entry to TP2 (reward). The indicator compares these distances and determines whether the setup meets or exceeds the minimum R:R value selected by the user.
If the calculated R:R is equal to or greater than the chosen threshold, the signal will be displayed.
If the calculated R:R is lower than the threshold, the signal will not appear on the chart.
🔹 Signal Rating Minimum
Users can restrict which signal ratings appear:
A: shows all signals
A+: shows only A+ and A++
A++: shows only A++ setups
🔹 Signal Styling and Customization
The indicator provides full control over how signal labels and levels appear on your chart. Users can customize long signals, short signals, all plotted lines, and the visibility of every individual element.
◇ Long Signal Styling
Users can customize:
Long Signal Label Color
Long Signal Text Color
Long Signal Label Size
◇ Short Signal Styling
Users can customize:
Short Signal Label Color
Short Signal Text Color
Short Signal Label Size
◇ Entry, Stop Loss, Breakeven, and Take Profit Lines
Each line type can be enabled or disabled individually:
Entry Line
Stop Loss Line
Breakeven Line
Take Profit 1 & 2 Lines
Users can also set custom colors for each line so every level is easy to track during live price movement.
◇ Show Price Labels
Price labels can be toggled on or off individually for each level. Users can choose whether to show or hide the price for:
Entry
Stop loss
Breakeven
Take Profit 1 & 2
NEW DAY OPENING GAP:
The New Day Opening Gap (NDOG) highlights the price difference between the previous day’s closing candle and the first candle of the new trading day. The indicator tracks this gap automatically each day and makes it available as optional context for users.
🔹 What Is the New Day Opening Gap?
A New Day Opening Gap forms when the trading day opens at a price different from the previous day’s final closing price.
If the new day opens above the prior day’s close → Bullish NDOG
If the new day opens below the prior day’s close → Bearish NDOG
This gap acts as a short-term draw on liquidity because the market may revisit the gap to rebalance price delivery. While the NDOG is not a required component for IFVG signals.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses the New Day Opening Gap
When enabled, the indicator plots the gap as a rectangular zone spanning from the previous day’s close to the new day’s open. The zone remains active until it is fully filled by price or until the next day’s opening gap forms. Once price trades through the entire gap, or once a new NDOG replaces it the following day, the zone becomes inactive and is removed from the chart. The indicator does not use the NDOG for signal generation. It is strictly a visual tool that helps traders identify areas where price may retrace or seek liquidity during the session.
🔹 Customization Options
Users have full control over how the New Day Opening Gap displays on the chart:
Show New Day Opening Gap: Toggle the NDOG zone on or off
Bullish NDOG Color: Customize the fill color for gaps formed above the prior close
Bearish NDOG Color: Customize the fill color for gaps formed below the prior close
NEW WEEK OPENING GAP:
The New Week Opening Gap (NWOG) highlights the price difference between the previous week’s final closing candle and the first candle of the new trading week. The indicator tracks this gap automatically each week and provides it as optional context for users.
🔹 What Is the New Week Opening Gap?
A New Week Opening Gap forms when the new trading week opens at a price different from the previous week’s closing price.
If the new week opens above the prior week’s close → Bullish NWOG
If the new week opens below the prior week’s close → Bearish NWOG
This gap often serves as a medium-term draw on liquidity because price may return to rebalance the weekly displacement. The NWOG is not a required component for IFVG signals.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses the New Week Opening Gap
When enabled, the indicator plots the gap as a rectangular zone spanning from the previous week’s close to the new week’s open. The zone remains active until it is fully filled by price or until the next week’s opening gap forms. Once price trades through the entire gap, or once a new NWOG replaces it the following week, the zone becomes inactive and is removed from the chart. The indicator does not use the NWOG for signal generation. It is purely a visual reference to help traders identify areas where price may rebalance or seek liquidity during the week.
🔹 Customization Options
Users have full control over how the New Week Opening Gap displays on the chart:
Show New Week Opening Gap: Toggle the NWOG zone on or off
Bullish NWOG Color: Set the fill color for gaps formed above the prior weekly close
Bearish NWOG Color: Set the fill color for gaps formed below the prior weekly close
SMT DIVERGENCES:
The indicator automatically marks SMT Divergences that occur between the current selected chart ticker and a second user-selected ticker.
A SMT Divergence forms when the prices of the currently selected chart ticker and the user-selected ticker don’t follow each other. For example, if the current chart’s ticker symbol is SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ and the user-selected ticker is $ES. If SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ does not sweep the low of the NY AM Session, but NYSE:ES sweeps that same exact session’s low during the same candle, then a SMT Divergence is detected.
In the images below, SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ and NYSE:ES form a low at 12:20 AM on November 12th. At 12:35 AM, the 12:20 AM low is taken out on $NQ. However, on NYSE:ES , price failed to take out this exact low at 12:35 AM. Thus, an SMT Divergence is detected, and a line is drawn between the two lows on $NQ.
NYSE:ES Chart:
SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ Chart:
🔹 SMT Divergence Settings
The indicator includes settings that allow users to control how SMT Divergences are detected and displayed.
◇ Length
Length controls how sensitive the pivot detection is when finding highs and lows for SMT.
Lower Length: confirms swings with fewer bars, so more swings qualify.
Higher Length: requires more bars to confirm a swing, so fewer swings qualify.
◇ Divergence Length
The Divergence Length setting defines how many bars apart the two swing points may be for them to count as part of the same SMT Divergence.
Higher Values: The two instruments can form their swing highs or lows farther apart in time. As long as both swings occur within this wider bar window, the indicator compares them for divergence.
Lower Values: The two swing points must occur very close to each other.
◇ Show Last
This setting limits how many recent SMT Divergences are displayed on the chart. For example, setting Show Last to 1 will only show the most recent SMT Divergence, while higher values allow more historical SMT Divergences to remain visible on the chart.
◇ Divergence Ticker
Users can change the ticker used for detections. Since SMT Divergences occur by comparing two tickers, the inputted ticker within the settings will always be compared to the current selected ticker on your chart.
DASHBOARD:
The dashboard provides a live summary of all major components of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model. It updates every candle and displays the current state of each requirement used in the setup logic.
🔹 Real-Time Model Components
The state of each component is displayed with the following:
✔️ = condition is satisfied
❌ = condition is not satisfied
🐂 / 🐻 = current directional bias (bullish or bearish)
The dashboard actively tracks the following:
◇ Bias (🐂 Bullish, 🐻 Bearish, or Both)
Shows the current bias with a bull or bear emoji. If using automatic bias, the dashboard updates as soon as the session logic determines a direction.
◇ Liquidity Sweep
Displays ✔️ once a valid BSL Sweep (for shorts) or SSL Sweep (for longs) is detected.
Shows ❌ when no sweep is present.
◇ V Shape Recovery
Displays ✔️ when a confirmed V shape recovery forms after the sweep.
Shows ❌ until a valid V shape appears.
◇ Inversion Fair Value Gap (IFVG)
Shows ✔️ once a bullish or bearish IFVG forms in the correct direction.
Shows ❌ when no IFVG has yet confirmed.
◇ Higher-Timeframe FVG Interaction
Displays ✔️ when price is currently inside any enabled HTF FVG or taps a HTF FVG during a liquidity sweep.
Displays ❌ when price is not inside a HTF imbalance.
◇ Clear Opposite Draw on Liquidity (DOL)
Shows ✔️ when a clear opposite-side draw is present in the model logic.
Shows ❌ if no clear opposite draw is detected.
◇ SMT Divergence
Shows ✔️ for 20 candles immediately after an SMT Divergence forms.
After 20 candles, it returns to ❌ unless a new SMT Divergence is detected.
🔹 Signal Information Display
When a valid long or short signal appears, the dashboard expands to show the full details of the setup, including:
Signal Rating
Entry Price
Stop-Loss Price
Breakeven Price
Take Profit 1 Price
Take Profit 2 Price
🔹 Trade Statistics Module
Users can enable a built-in statistics panel to view historical performance of signals across all ratings. The trade stats include:
A Signal Win Rate
A+ Signal Win Rate
A++ Signal Win Rate
Long Signal Win Rate
Short Signal Win Rate
Total Number of Trades Used in the Calculations
A trade is counted as a win if price reaches breakeven before stop-loss. A trade is counted as a loss if price hits stop-loss before breakeven.
🔹 Dashboard Customization
The dashboard includes several options to control its appearance and position:
Show Dashboard: Toggle the entire dashboard on or off
Dashboard Size: Choose the size of the dashboard
Dashboard Position: Choose the location of the dashboard on the chart
Trade Stats Text Color: Customize the color of the 2nd column outputs under the Trade Stats section in the dashboard
◇ Component Toggles
Users can enable or disable the display of any model component based on preference. Each of these items can be shown or hidden independently:
Setup Rating
Entry
Stop-Loss
Breakeven
Take Profit 1
Take Profit 2
Bias
Liquidity Sweep
Higher-Timeframe FVG Interaction
V Shape Recovery
Inversion FVG
Clear Opposite Draw on Liquidity
Trade Stats
These toggles only affect visual display. Disabling any of them does not affect the underlying indicator’s logic.
ALERTS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model includes full alert functionality using AnyAlert(), allowing users to receive notifications in real time for all major model components and signal events.
Users can enable or disable each alert type in the “Alerts” section of the settings. After selecting which alerts they want active, they can create a single TradingView alert using the AnyAlert() condition. This will automatically trigger alerts for all enabled events as soon as they occur on the chart.
Available Alerts:
Long Signal
Short Signal
Breakeven Hit (BE)
Take Profit 1 Hit (TP1)
Take Profit 2 Hit (TP2)
Stop-Loss Hit (SL)
Liquidity Sweep Detected
SMT Divergence Detected
How to Receive Alerts:
Open the TradingView alert creation window.
Select the IFVG Model indicator as the alert condition.
Choose AnyAlert() from the condition dropdown.
Create the alert.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
TradingView has limitations when running features on multiple timeframes such as the HTF FVGs, which can result in the following restriction:
Computation Error:
The computation of using MTF features is very intensive on TradingView. This can sometimes cause calculation timeouts. When this occurs, simply force the recalculation by modifying one indicator’s settings or by removing the indicator and adding it to your chart again.
UNIQUENESS:
This indicator is unique because it organizes every part of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model into one structured, rules based system. It detects liquidity sweeps, confirms V shape recoveries, identifies valid IFVGs, checks higher timeframe FVG taps, reads macro timing, and applies a session based directional bias. All of these components are evaluated in a fixed sequence so users always know exactly why a signal appears. Every part of the logic is customizable, including which liquidity types are used, which IFVGs qualify for signals, which time windows allow trades, the minimum risk to reward for a setup, and all visual elements on the chart. The tool also includes optional SMT Divergence detection, daily and weekly opening gaps, a live dashboard that shows the state of each model requirement, and optional signal performance statistics.
[GetSparx] Nova Pro⚡ Nova Pro – Position Calculator
This indicator is a user-friendly TradingView indicator designed to help traders plan and visualize their entry and exit points, calculate position sizing, and instantly display key risk metrics. By simply entering three price levels (Entry, Take Profit and Stop Loss) along with a risk amount in USD, the indicator draws color-coded lines and labels on the chart, and generates a concise table with all computed values. This allows you to assess the risk-reward profile of any trade at a glance, without performing manual calculations.
⚙️ How It Works
When the indicator is added to the chart it will ask to specify the price inputs and the risk amount in USD.
Price Inputs (Entry, TP, SL)
• You specify three price levels: the entry price, the profit target (Take Profit) and the loss threshold (Stop Loss).
• Inputs use TradingView’s native price-picker fields. Any change is immediately reflected on the chart.
Visual Display
• Each level is plotted as a line stretching into the future for enough room.
• Labels on the right show the exact price, color-coded: orange for Entry, green for TP and red for SL.
• Previous lines and labels are automatically removed when parameters change, ensuring the chart remains clean.
Risk Calculations
• The entered risk amount (in USD) is combined with the distance between Entry and SL to compute the optimal number of units (Qty) to trade.
• The script automatically detects whether it’s a long or short trade based on the relative positions of Entry and TP.
• Note that the risk and reward calculations do not factor in exchange fees, slippage, funding rates or any other trading costs. Actual profit and loss may differ once transaction fees and market execution variances are applied, so be sure to adjust your position sizing and expectations accordingly.
🎯 What You Can Do With It
• Consistent Position Sizing
Automate your position size so you consistently risk the same dollar amount, regardless of price volatility or stop distance.
• Clear Risk Management
Instantly view your Reward-to-Risk ratio, potential profit in USD and exact risk amount, so you make well-informed decisions.
• Rapid Scenario Analysis
Adjust TP, SL or Entry on the fly to see how each change affects your potential profit, loss and RR ratio.
• Publication-Ready Charts
The visual elements and integrated table are optimized for TradingView publications, giving your analysis a professional, polished look.
📊 Explanation of Table Values
• Entry
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered entry price.
Marks the exact level at which you initiate the trade and serves as the reference point for all further risk and reward calculations.
• Quantity (Qty)
Calculation: Risk USD ÷ (Entry − Stop Loss).
Determines how many units, contracts or shares to trade so that a stop-out at your SL equals exactly your predefined dollar risk, resulting in consistent per-trade exposure.
• Risk to Reward (RR)
Calculation: (Take Profit − Entry) ÷ (Entry − Stop Loss).
Expresses how many dollars of potential profit you target for each dollar you risk. Values above 1 mean the reward exceeds the risk, guiding you to favorable setups.
• Take Profit (TP)
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered take-profit price.
Your target exit level for booking gains, highlighted in green on the chart. Shows where you plan to capture profits if the market moves in your favor.
• Profit
Calculation: Qty × (Take Profit − Entry).
Gives the absolute potential gain in USD if price reaches your TP. Useful for comparing total return across different instruments or setups.
• Stop Loss (SL)
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered stop-loss price.
The level at which your trade is automatically closed to cap losses, highlighted in red on the chart. Ensures you never lose more than your defined risk amount.
• Risk
Calculation: equals the entered Risk USD.
The maximum dollar amount you’re willing to lose on this trade. Acts as the upper boundary for your exposure, keeping your position sizing disciplined.
📝 Examples
• Long Example 1: Bitcoin/USD
Entry: $11851.1
Take Profit: $123853.9
Stop Loss: $115467.7
Risk USD: $500
The Risk to Reward ratio results in 2.25, which means the reward exceeds the risk.
For each dollar you risk, this setup has potential gains of 2.25 dollars.
• Long Example 2: Algorand/USD
Entry: $0.2919
Take Profit: $0.3491
Stop Loss: $0.2655
Risk USD: $1000
The Risk to Reward ratio on this trade results in 2.17 and has a potential profit target of $2166.67. With a risk of $1000 USD the table conveniently shows a quantity of 37878 ALGO is needed for the trade.
• Short Example 1: Forex EUR/USD
Entry: $1.16666
Take Profit: $1.15459
Stop Loss: $1.17374
Risk USD: $200
With a risk of $200 USD and a RR of 2.17, this example shows how a short trade can be accomplished on EUR/USD.
• Short Example 2: Gold
Entry: $3366.29
Take Profit: $3272.01
Stop Loss: $3386.87
Risk USD: $1500
Within this short setup a risk of $1500 USD is used, which results in a RR of 4.58. The potential profit for this trade is $6871.72.
⚠ Disclaimer
This tool is for educational and analytical use only. It does not provide financial advice or trading signals. Always use proper risk management and do your own due diligence.
Scout Regiment - MACD# Scout Regiment - MACD Indicator
## English Documentation
### Overview
Scout Regiment - MACD is an advanced implementation of the Moving Average Convergence Divergence indicator with enhanced features including dual divergence detection (histogram and MACD line), customizable moving average types, multi-timeframe analysis, and sophisticated visual elements. This indicator provides traders with comprehensive momentum analysis and high-probability reversal signals.
### What is MACD?
MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence) is a trend-following momentum indicator that shows the relationship between two moving averages:
- **MACD Line**: Difference between fast and slow EMAs
- **Signal Line**: Moving average of the MACD line
- **Histogram**: Difference between MACD line and signal line
- **Purpose**: Identifies trend direction, momentum strength, and potential reversals
### Key Features
#### 1. **Enhanced MACD Display**
**Three Core Components:**
**MACD Line** (Default: Blue/Orange, 2px)
- Fast EMA (13) minus Slow EMA (34)
- Shows momentum direction
- Color changes based on position relative to signal line:
- Blue: Above signal line (bullish)
- Orange: Below signal line (bearish)
- Can be toggled on/off
**Signal Line** (Default: White/Blue with transparency, 2px)
- EMA (9) of the MACD line
- Serves as trigger line for crossover signals
- Color varies based on settings
- Essential for identifying entry/exit points
**Histogram** (Default: 4-color gradient, 4px columns)
- Difference between MACD and signal line
- Visual representation of momentum strength
- Advanced 4-color scheme:
- **Dark Green (#26A69A)**: Positive and increasing (strong bullish)
- **Light Green (#B2DFDB)**: Positive but decreasing (weakening bullish)
- **Dark Red (#FF5252)**: Negative and decreasing (strong bearish)
- **Light Red (#FFCDD2)**: Negative but increasing (weakening bearish)
- Histogram tells the "story" of momentum changes
#### 2. **Customizable Moving Average Types**
**Oscillator MA Type** (MACD Line calculation):
- **EMA** (Exponential) - Default, more responsive
- **SMA** (Simple) - Smoother, less responsive
**Signal Line MA Type**:
- **EMA** (Exponential) - Default, faster signals
- **SMA** (Simple) - Slower, fewer false signals
**Flexibility**: Mix and match for different trading styles
- EMA/EMA: Most responsive (day trading)
- SMA/SMA: Smoothest (swing trading)
- EMA/SMA or SMA/EMA: Balanced approaches
#### 3. **Multi-Timeframe Capability**
**Current Chart Period** (Default: Enabled)
- Uses current timeframe automatically
- Simplest option for most traders
**Custom Timeframe Selection**
- Calculate MACD on any timeframe
- Display higher timeframe MACD on lower timeframe charts
- Example: View 1H MACD on 15min chart
- **Use Case**: Align lower timeframe trades with higher timeframe momentum
#### 4. **Visual Enhancement Features**
**Golden Cross / Death Cross Markers**
- Circles mark crossover points
- Color matches MACD line color
- Clearly identifies entry/exit signals
- Can be toggled on/off
**Zero Line** (White, 2px solid)
- Reference for positive/negative momentum
- Critical level for trend identification
- MACD above zero = Bullish bias
- MACD below zero = Bearish bias
**Color Transitions**
- MACD line changes color at signal line crosses
- Histogram shows momentum acceleration/deceleration
- Provides early warning of trend changes
#### 5. **Dual Divergence Detection System**
This indicator features TWO separate divergence detection systems:
**A. Histogram Divergence Detection**
- **Purpose**: Earlier divergence signals (most sensitive)
- **Detects**: Regular bullish and bearish divergences
- **Label**: "H涨" (Histogram Up), "H跌" (Histogram Down)
- **Special Feature**: Same-sign requirement option
- Top divergence: Both histogram points must be positive
- Bottom divergence: Both histogram points must be negative
- Filters out less reliable divergences
**B. MACD Line Divergence Detection**
- **Purpose**: Stronger, more reliable divergences
- **Detects**: Regular bullish and bearish divergences
- **Label**: "M涨" (MACD Up), "M跌" (MACD Down)
- **Use**: Confirmation of histogram divergences or standalone
**Divergence Types Explained:**
**Regular Bullish Divergence (Yellow)**
- **Price**: Lower lows
- **Indicator**: Higher lows (histogram OR MACD line)
- **Signal**: Potential upward reversal
- **Best**: Near support levels, oversold conditions
- **Entry**: After price breaks above recent resistance
**Regular Bearish Divergence (Blue)**
- **Price**: Higher highs
- **Indicator**: Lower highs (histogram OR MACD line)
- **Signal**: Potential downward reversal
- **Best**: Near resistance levels, overbought conditions
- **Entry**: After price breaks below recent support
#### 6. **Advanced Divergence Parameters**
**Histogram Divergence Settings:**
- **Price Reference**: Wicks (default) or Bodies
- **Right Lookback**: Bars to right of pivot (default: 2)
- **Left Lookback**: Bars to left of pivot (default: 5)
- **Max Range**: Maximum bars between divergences (default: 60)
- **Min Range**: Minimum bars between divergences (default: 5)
- **Same Sign Requirement**: Ensures both histogram points have same sign
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Toggle display
- **Show Labels**: Toggle divergence labels
**MACD Line Divergence Settings:**
- **Price Reference**: Wicks (default) or Bodies
- **Right Lookback**: Bars to right of pivot (default: 1)
- **Left Lookback**: Bars to left of pivot (default: 5)
- **Max Range**: Maximum bars between divergences (default: 60)
- **Min Range**: Minimum bars between divergences (default: 5)
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Toggle display
- **Show Labels**: Toggle divergence labels
**Independent Control**: Adjust histogram and MACD line divergences separately
### Configuration Settings
#### MACD Basic Settings
- **Fast EMA Period**: Fast moving average length (default: 13)
- **Slow EMA Period**: Slow moving average length (default: 34)
- **Signal Line Period**: Signal line length (default: 9)
- **Use Current Chart Period**: Auto-adjust to current timeframe
- **Select Period**: Choose custom timeframe
- **Show MACD & Signal Lines**: Toggle lines display
- **Show Cross Markers**: Toggle golden/death cross dots
- **Show Histogram**: Toggle histogram display
- **Show Crossover Color Change**: Enable MACD line color change
- **Show Histogram Colors**: Enable 4-color histogram scheme
- **Oscillator MA Type**: Choose SMA or EMA for MACD
- **Signal Line MA Type**: Choose SMA or EMA for signal
#### Histogram Divergence Settings
- **Show Histogram Divergence**: Enable histogram divergence detection
- **Price Reference**: Wicks or Bodies for price comparison
- **Right/Left Lookback**: Pivot detection parameters
- **Max/Min Range**: Distance constraints between pivots
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Display histogram divergence lines
- **Show Labels**: Display histogram divergence labels
- **Require Same Sign**: Enforce histogram sign consistency
#### MACD Line Divergence Settings
- **Show MACD Line Divergence**: Enable MACD line divergence detection
- **Price Reference**: Wicks or Bodies for price comparison
- **Right/Left Lookback**: Pivot detection parameters
- **Max/Min Range**: Distance constraints between pivots
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Display MACD line divergence lines
- **Show Labels**: Display MACD line divergence labels
### How to Use
#### For Basic Trend Following
1. **Enable Core Components**
- MACD line, signal line, and histogram
- Enable cross markers
2. **Identify Trend**
- MACD above zero = Uptrend
- MACD below zero = Downtrend
3. **Watch for Crossovers**
- Golden cross (MACD crosses above signal) = Buy signal
- Death cross (MACD crosses below signal) = Sell signal
4. **Confirm with Histogram**
- Increasing histogram = Strengthening trend
- Decreasing histogram = Weakening trend
#### For Divergence Trading
1. **Enable Both Divergence Systems**
- Histogram divergence (early signals)
- MACD line divergence (confirmation)
2. **Wait for Divergence Signals**
- "H涨" or "H跌" = Early warning
- "M涨" or "M跌" = Confirmation
3. **Best Divergences**
- Both histogram AND MACD line showing divergence
- Divergence at key support/resistance levels
- Multiple divergences on same trend
4. **Entry Timing**
- Wait for price structure break
- Enter on pullback after confirmation
- Use MACD crossover as trigger
#### For Multi-Timeframe Analysis
1. **Set Higher Timeframe**
- Example: 4H MACD on 1H chart
- Uncheck "Use Current Chart Period"
- Select desired timeframe
2. **Identify Higher TF Trend**
- MACD position relative to zero
- MACD vs signal line relationship
3. **Trade with HTF Direction**
- Only take long signals if HTF MACD bullish
- Only take short signals if HTF MACD bearish
4. **Use Current TF for Entries**
- Higher TF for bias
- Current TF for precise timing
#### For Histogram Analysis
1. **Enable 4-Color Histogram**
- Watch color transitions
- Dark colors = Strong momentum
- Light colors = Weakening momentum
2. **Momentum Stages**
- Dark green → Light green = Bullish losing steam
- Light red → Dark red = Bearish gaining strength
3. **Trade Transitions**
- Light green to light red = Momentum shift (potential reversal)
- Entry on confirmation crossover
### Trading Strategies
#### Strategy 1: Classic MACD Crossover
**Setup:**
- Standard settings (13/34/9)
- Enable MACD, signal line, and cross markers
- Clear trend on higher timeframe
**Entry:**
- **Long**: Golden cross (circle marker) above zero line
- **Short**: Death cross (circle marker) below zero line
**Confirmation:**
- Histogram color supporting direction
- Volume increase helps
**Stop Loss:**
- Below recent swing low (long)
- Above recent swing high (short)
**Exit:**
- Opposite crossover
- MACD crosses zero line against position
**Best For:** Trend following, clear trending markets
#### Strategy 2: Zero Line Bounce
**Setup:**
- Enable all components
- Established trend (MACD staying one side of zero)
- Wait for pullback to zero line
**Entry:**
- **Long**: MACD touches zero from above, bounces up with golden cross
- **Short**: MACD touches zero from below, bounces down with death cross
**Confirmation:**
- Histogram color change
- Price at support/resistance
**Stop Loss:**
- Just beyond zero line (opposite side)
**Exit:**
- Target previous extreme
- Or opposite crossover
**Best For:** Trend continuation, strong markets
#### Strategy 3: Dual Divergence Confirmation
**Setup:**
- Enable both histogram and MACD line divergences
- Price at extreme (high/low)
- Wait for divergence signals
**Entry:**
- **Long**: Both "H涨" AND "M涨" labels appear
- **Short**: Both "H跌" AND "M跌" labels appear
**Confirmation:**
- Price breaks structure
- Volume increase
- Golden/death cross confirms
**Stop Loss:**
- Beyond divergence pivot point
**Exit:**
- MACD crosses zero line
- Or opposite divergence appears
**Best For:** Reversal trading, swing trading
#### Strategy 4: Histogram Color Transition
**Setup:**
- Enable 4-color histogram
- Focus on color changes
- Price in trend
**Entry:**
- **Long**: Light red → Light green transition + golden cross
- **Short**: Light green → Light red transition + death cross
**Rationale:**
- Light colors show momentum exhaustion
- Color flip = momentum shift
- Early entry before full trend reversal
**Stop Loss:**
- Recent swing point
**Exit:**
- Histogram color turns light against position
- Or at predetermined target
**Best For:** Scalping, day trading, early entries
#### Strategy 5: Multi-Timeframe Momentum
**Setup:**
- Display higher timeframe MACD (e.g., 4H on 1H chart)
- Current chart shows current momentum
- Higher TF shows overall bias
**Entry:**
- **Long**: HTF MACD above zero + current TF golden cross
- **Short**: HTF MACD below zero + current TF death cross
**Confirmation:**
- HTF histogram supporting direction
- Both timeframes aligned
**Stop Loss:**
- Based on current timeframe structure
**Exit:**
- Current TF opposite crossover
- Or HTF MACD momentum weakens
**Best For:** Swing trading, high-probability setups
#### Strategy 6: Histogram-Only Divergence Scout
**Setup:**
- Enable only histogram divergence
- Use "same sign requirement"
- Focus on early signals
**Entry:**
- **Long**: "H涨" label + price at support
- **Short**: "H跌" label + price at resistance
**Confirmation:**
- Wait for MACD/signal crossover
- Or price structure break
**Advantage:**
- Earliest divergence signals
- Get in before crowd
**Risk:**
- More false signals than MACD line divergence
- Requires strict confirmation
**Stop Loss:**
- Tight stop beyond entry bar
**Exit:**
- Quick targets (30-50% of expected move)
- Or trail stop
**Best For:** Active traders, scalpers seeking early entries
### Best Practices
#### MACD Period Selection
**Standard (13/34/9)** - Default
- Balanced for most markets
- Good for day trading and swing trading
- Widely used, works with general market psychology
**Faster (8/21/5 or 12/26/9)**
- More responsive
- More signals, more noise
- Best for: Scalping, volatile markets
- Risk: More false signals
**Slower (21/55/13)**
- Smoother signals
- Fewer but stronger signals
- Best for: Swing trading, position trading
- Benefit: Higher reliability
#### Histogram vs MACD Line Divergences
**Histogram Divergence:**
- ✅ Earlier signals
- ✅ Catch moves before others
- ❌ More false signals
- ❌ Requires confirmation
- **Best for**: Active traders, scalpers
**MACD Line Divergence:**
- ✅ More reliable
- ✅ Stronger divergences
- ❌ Later signals
- ❌ May miss early moves
- **Best for**: Swing traders, conservative traders
**Both Together:**
- ✅ Maximum confidence
- ✅ Histogram for alert, MACD for confirmation
- ✅ Highest probability setups
- **Best for**: All traders seeking quality over quantity
#### Same Sign Requirement Feature
**Enabled (Recommended):**
- Filters low-quality divergences
- Top divergence: Both histogram points positive
- Bottom divergence: Both histogram points negative
- Results in fewer but more reliable signals
**Disabled:**
- More divergence signals
- Includes zero-line crossing divergences
- Higher false signal rate
- Only for experienced traders
#### Price Reference: Wicks vs Bodies
**Wicks (Default):**
- Uses high/low prices
- Catches all extremes
- More divergences detected
- Best for: Most trading styles
**Bodies:**
- Uses open/close prices
- Filters out spike movements
- Fewer but cleaner divergences
- Best for: Noisy markets, crypto
#### Visual Settings Recommendations
**For Beginners:**
- Enable: MACD line, signal line, histogram
- Enable: Cross markers
- Enable: Histogram colors
- Disable: Both divergence systems initially
- Focus: Learn basic crossovers first
**For Intermediate:**
- All basic components
- Add: Histogram divergence only
- Use: Same sign requirement
- Focus: Early reversal signals
**For Advanced:**
- All components
- Both divergence systems
- Custom parameters per market
- Multi-timeframe analysis
- Focus: High-probability confluence setups
### Indicator Combinations
**With Moving Averages (EMAs):**
- EMAs (21/55/144) show trend
- MACD shows momentum
- Enter when both align
- Exit when MACD turns first
**With RSI:**
- RSI for overbought/oversold
- MACD for momentum confirmation
- Divergence on both = Extremely strong signal
- RSI + MACD divergence = High probability trade
**With Volume:**
- Volume confirms MACD signals
- Crossover + volume spike = Valid breakout
- Divergence + volume divergence = Strong reversal
**With Support/Resistance:**
- S/R levels for entry/exit targets
- MACD divergence at levels = Highest probability
- MACD crossover at level = Strong confirmation
**With Bias Indicator:**
- Bias shows price deviation from EMA
- MACD shows momentum
- Both diverging = Powerful reversal signal
- Bias extreme + MACD divergence = High conviction trade
**With OBV:**
- OBV shows volume trend
- MACD shows price momentum
- OBV + MACD divergence = Volume not supporting price
- Strong reversal indication
**With KSI (RSI/CCI):**
- KSI for oscillator extremes
- MACD for momentum direction
- KSI extreme + MACD divergence = Reversal likely
- All aligned = Maximum confidence
### Common MACD Patterns
1. **Bullish Cross Above Zero**: Strong uptrend continuation signal
2. **Bearish Cross Below Zero**: Strong downtrend continuation signal
3. **Zero Line Rejection**: Price respects zero as support/resistance
4. **Histogram Peak**: Momentum climax, watch for reversal
5. **Double Divergence**: Two divergences without reversal = Very strong signal when it finally reverses
6. **Histogram Convergence**: Histogram narrowing = Trend losing steam
7. **Signal Line Hug**: MACD stays close to signal = Consolidation, expect breakout
### Performance Tips
- Start with default settings (13/34/9 EMA/EMA)
- Test one divergence system at a time
- Use same sign requirement initially
- Enable cross markers for clear signals
- Adjust lookback parameters per market volatility
- Higher timeframe MACD more reliable than lower
- Combine histogram early signal with MACD line confirmation
- Don't trade every divergence - wait for best setups
### Alert Conditions
While not explicitly coded, you can set custom alerts on:
- MACD crossing above/below signal line
- MACD crossing above/below zero line
- Histogram crossing zero
- When divergence labels appear (using visual alerts)
---
## 中文说明文档
### 概述
Scout Regiment - MACD 是移动平均线收敛发散指标的高级实现版本，具有增强功能，包括双重背离检测（直方图和MACD线）、可自定义的移动平均类型、多时间框架分析和复杂的视觉元素。该指标为交易者提供全面的动量分析和高概率反转信号。
### 什么是MACD？
MACD（移动平均线收敛发散）是一个趋势跟随动量指标，显示两条移动平均线之间的关系：
- **MACD线**：快速和慢速EMA之间的差值
- **信号线**：MACD线的移动平均
- **直方图**：MACD线和信号线之间的差值
- **用途**：识别趋势方向、动量强度和潜在反转
### 核心功能
#### 1. **增强的MACD显示**
**三个核心组件：**
**MACD线**（默认：蓝色/橙色，2像素）
- 快速EMA（13）减去慢速EMA（34）
- 显示动量方向
- 根据相对于信号线的位置改变颜色：
- 蓝色：信号线上方（看涨）
- 橙色：信号线下方（看跌）
- 可开关显示
**信号线**（默认：白色/蓝色带透明度，2像素）
- MACD线的EMA（9）
- 作为交叉信号的触发线
- 颜色根据设置变化
- 识别进出场点的关键
**直方图**（默认：4色渐变，4像素柱）
- MACD和信号线之间的差值
- 动量强度的视觉表示
- 高级4色方案：
- **深绿色（#26A69A）**：正值且增加（强劲看涨）
- **浅绿色（#B2DFDB）**：正值但减少（看涨减弱）
- **深红色（#FF5252）**：负值且减少（强劲看跌）
- **浅红色（#FFCDD2）**：负值但增加（看跌减弱）
- 直方图讲述动量变化的"故事"
#### 2. **可自定义的移动平均类型**
**振荡器MA类型**（MACD线计算）：
- **EMA**（指数）- 默认，反应更快
- **SMA**（简单）- 更平滑，反应较慢
**信号线MA类型**：
- **EMA**（指数）- 默认，更快信号
- **SMA**（简单）- 更慢，假信号更少
**灵活性**：混合搭配以适应不同交易风格
- EMA/EMA：最灵敏（日内交易）
- SMA/SMA：最平滑（波段交易）
- EMA/SMA或SMA/EMA：平衡方法
#### 3. **多时间框架功能**
**当前图表周期**（默认：启用）
- 自动使用当前时间框架
- 大多数交易者的最简单选项
**自定义时间框架选择**
- 在任何时间框架上计算MACD
- 在低时间框架图表上显示高时间框架MACD
- 示例：在15分钟图上查看1小时MACD
- **使用场景**：使低时间框架交易与高时间框架动量保持一致
#### 4. **视觉增强功能**
**金叉/死叉标记**
- 圆点标记交叉点
- 颜色与MACD线颜色匹配
- 清晰识别进出场信号
- 可开关
**零线**（白色，2像素实线）
- 正负动量的参考
- 趋势识别的关键水平
- MACD在零线上方 = 看涨偏向
- MACD在零线下方 = 看跌偏向
**颜色转换**
- MACD线在信号线交叉处改变颜色
- 直方图显示动量加速/减速
- 提供趋势变化的早期警告
#### 5. **双重背离检测系统**
该指标具有两个独立的背离检测系统：
**A. 直方图背离检测**
- **用途**：更早的背离信号（最敏感）
- **检测**：常规看涨和看跌背离
- **标签**："H涨"（直方图上涨）、"H跌"（直方图下跌）
- **特殊功能**：同符号要求选项
- 顶背离：两个直方图点都必须为正
- 底背离：两个直方图点都必须为负
- 过滤不太可靠的背离
**B. MACD线背离检测**
- **用途**：更强、更可靠的背离
- **检测**：常规看涨和看跌背离
- **标签**："M涨"（MACD上涨）、"M跌"（MACD下跌）
- **用途**：确认直方图背离或独立使用
**背离类型说明：**
**常规看涨背离（黄色）**
- **价格**：更低的低点
- **指标**：更高的低点（直方图或MACD线）
- **信号**：潜在向上反转
- **最佳**：在支撑水平附近、超卖状况
- **入场**：价格突破近期阻力后
**常规看跌背离（蓝色）**
- **价格**：更高的高点
- **指标**：更低的高点（直方图或MACD线）
- **信号**：潜在向下反转
- **最佳**：在阻力水平附近、超买状况
- **入场**：价格跌破近期支撑后
#### 6. **高级背离参数**
**直方图背离设置：**
- **价格参考**：影线（默认）或实体
- **右侧回溯**：枢轴点右侧K线数（默认：2）
- **左侧回溯**：枢轴点左侧K线数（默认：5）
- **最大范围**：背离之间最大K线数（默认：60）
- **最小范围**：背离之间最小K线数（默认：5）
- **同符号要求**：确保两个直方图点符号相同
- **显示常规背离**：切换显示
- **显示标签**：切换背离标签
**MACD线背离设置：**
- **价格参考**：影线（默认）或实体
- **右侧回溯**：枢轴点右侧K线数（默认：1）
- **左侧回溯**：枢轴点左侧K线数（默认：5）
- **最大范围**：背离之间最大K线数（默认：60）
- **最小范围**：背离之间最小K线数（默认：5）
- **显示常规背离**：切换显示
- **显示标签**：切换背离标签
**独立控制**：分别调整直方图和MACD线背离
### 配置设置
#### MACD基础设置
- **快速EMA周期**：快速移动平均长度（默认：13）
- **慢速EMA周期**：慢速移动平均长度（默认：34）
- **信号线周期**：信号线长度（默认：9）
- **使用当前图表周期**：自动调整到当前时间框架
- **选择周期**：选择自定义时间框架
- **显示MACD线和信号线**：切换线条显示
- **显示金叉死叉圆点标记**：切换金叉/死叉圆点
- **显示直方图**：切换直方图显示
- **显示穿越变化MACD线**：启用MACD线颜色变化
- **显示直方图颜色**：启用4色直方图方案
- **振荡器MA类型**：为MACD选择SMA或EMA
- **信号线MA类型**：为信号线选择SMA或EMA
#### 直方图背离设置
- **显示直方图背离信号**：启用直方图背离检测
- **价格参考**：影线或实体用于价格比较
- **右侧/左侧回溯**：枢轴检测参数
- **最大/最小范围**：枢轴之间的距离约束
- **显示直方图常规背离**：显示直方图背离线
- **显示直方图常规背离标签**：显示直方图背离标签
- **要求背离点柱状图同符号**：强制直方图符号一致性
#### MACD线背离设置
- **显示MACD线背离信号**：启用MACD线背离检测
- **价格参考**：影线或实体用于价格比较
- **右侧/左侧回溯**：枢轴检测参数
- **最大/最小范围**：枢轴之间的距离约束
- **显示线常规背离**：显示MACD线背离线
- **显示线常规背离标签**：显示MACD线背离标签
### 使用方法
#### 基础趋势跟随
1. **启用核心组件**
- MACD线、信号线和直方图
- 启用交叉标记
2. **识别趋势**
- MACD在零线上方 = 上升趋势
- MACD在零线下方 = 下降趋势
3. **观察交叉**
- 金叉（MACD向上穿越信号线）= 买入信号
- 死叉（MACD向下穿越信号线）= 卖出信号
4. **用直方图确认**
- 直方图增加 = 趋势加强
- 直方图减少 = 趋势减弱
#### 背离交易
1. **启用两个背离系统**
- 直方图背离（早期信号）
- MACD线背离（确认）
2. **等待背离信号**
- "H涨"或"H跌" = 早期警告
- "M涨"或"M跌" = 确认
3. **最佳背离**
- 直方图和MACD线都显示背离
- 在关键支撑/阻力水平的背离
- 同一趋势上多个背离
4. **入场时机**
- 等待价格结构突破
- 确认后回调时进入
- 使用MACD交叉作为触发
#### 多时间框架分析
1. **设置更高时间框架**
- 示例：在1小时图上显示4小时MACD
- 取消勾选"使用当前图表周期"
- 选择所需时间框架
2. **识别更高TF趋势**
- MACD相对于零线的位置
- MACD与信号线的关系
3. **顺HTF方向交易**
- 仅在HTF MACD看涨时接受多头信号
- 仅在HTF MACD看跌时接受空头信号
4. **使用当前TF入场**
- 更高TF确定偏向
- 当前TF精确定时
#### 直方图分析
1. **启用4色直方图**
- 观察颜色转换
- 深色 = 强动量
- 浅色 = 动量减弱
2. **动量阶段**
- 深绿色→浅绿色 = 看涨失去动力
- 浅红色→深红色 = 看跌获得力量
3. **交易转换**
- 浅绿色到浅红色 = 动量转变（潜在反转）
- 确认交叉时入场
### 交易策略
#### 策略1：经典MACD交叉
**设置：**
- 标准设置（13/34/9）
- 启用MACD、信号线和交叉标记
- 更高时间框架明确趋势
**入场：**
- **多头**：零线上方金叉（圆点标记）
- **空头**：零线下方死叉（圆点标记）
**确认：**
- 直方图颜色支持方向
- 成交量增加有帮助
**止损：**
- 近期波动低点之下（多头）
- 近期波动高点之上（空头）
**离场：**
- 相反交叉
- MACD反向穿越零线
**适合：**趋势跟随、明确趋势市场
#### 策略2：零线反弹
**设置：**
- 启用所有组件
- 已建立趋势（MACD保持在零线一侧）
- 等待回调至零线
**入场：**
- **多头**：MACD从上方触及零线，向上反弹并金叉
- **空头**：MACD从下方触及零线，向下反弹并死叉
**确认：**
- 直方图颜色变化
- 价格在支撑/阻力位
**止损：**
- 零线对面一侧
**离场：**
- 目标前一极值
- 或相反交叉
**适合：**趋势延续、强势市场
#### 策略3：双重背离确认
**设置：**
- 启用直方图和MACD线背离
- 价格在极值（高点/低点）
- 等待背离信号
**入场：**
- **多头**："H涨"和"M涨"标签都出现
- **空头**："H跌"和"M跌"标签都出现
**确认：**
- 价格突破结构
- 成交量增加
- 金叉/死叉确认
**止损：**
- 背离枢轴点之外
**离场：**
- MACD穿越零线
- 或出现相反背离
**适合：**反转交易、波段交易
#### 策略4：直方图颜色转换
**设置：**
- 启用4色直方图
- 关注颜色变化
- 价格处于趋势
**入场：**
- **多头**：浅红色→浅绿色转换 + 金叉
- **空头**：浅绿色→浅红色转换 + 死叉
**原理：**
- 浅色显示动量衰竭
- 颜色翻转 = 动量转变
- 完全趋势反转前的早期入场
**止损：**
- 近期波动点
**离场：**
- 直方图颜色变为反向浅色
- 或预定目标
**适合：**剥头皮、日内交易、早期入场
#### 策略5：多时间框架动量
**设置：**
- 显示更高时间框架MACD（例如，在1小时图上显示4小时）
- 当前图表显示当前动量
- 更高TF显示整体偏向
**入场：**
- **多头**：HTF MACD在零线上方 + 当前TF金叉
- **空头**：HTF MACD在零线下方 + 当前TF死叉
**确认：**
- HTF直方图支持方向
- 两个时间框架对齐
**止损：**
- 基于当前时间框架结构
**离场：**
- 当前TF相反交叉
- 或HTF MACD动量减弱
**适合：**波段交易、高概率设置
#### 策略6：仅直方图背离侦察
**设置：**
- 仅启用直方图背离
- 使用"同符号要求"
- 关注早期信号
**入场：**
- **多头**："H涨"标签 + 价格在支撑位
- **空头**："H跌"标签 + 价格在阻力位
**确认：**
- 等待MACD/信号线交叉
- 或价格结构突破
**优势：**
- 最早的背离信号
- 在大众之前进入
**风险：**
- 比MACD线背离假信号更多
- 需要严格确认
**止损：**
- 入场K线之外紧密止损
**离场：**
- 快速目标（预期波动的30-50%）
- 或移动止损
**适合：**活跃交易者、寻求早期入场的剥头皮交易者
### 最佳实践
#### MACD周期选择
**标准（13/34/9）** - 默认
- 大多数市场的平衡
- 适合日内交易和波段交易
- 广泛使用，符合一般市场心理
**更快（8/21/5或12/26/9）**
- 更灵敏
- 更多信号，更多噪音
- 最适合：剥头皮、波动市场
- 风险：更多假信号
**更慢（21/55/13）**
- 更平滑的信号
- 信号较少但更强
- 最适合：波段交易、仓位交易
- 优势：更高可靠性
#### 直方图vs MACD线背离
**直方图背离：**
- ✅ 更早信号
- ✅ 在其他人之前捕捉波动
- ❌ 更多假信号
- ❌ 需要确认
- **最适合**：活跃交易者、剥头皮交易者
**MACD线背离：**
- ✅ 更可靠
- ✅ 更强的背离
- ❌ 信号较晚
- ❌ 可能错过早期波动
- **最适合**：波段交易者、保守交易者
**两者结合：**
- ✅ 最大信心
- ✅ 直方图警报，MACD确认
- ✅ 最高概率设置
- **最适合**：所有寻求质量而非数量的交易者
#### 同符号要求功能
**启用（推荐）：**
- 过滤低质量背离
- 顶背离：两个直方图点都为正
- 底背离：两个直方图点都为负
- 产生更少但更可靠的信号
**禁用：**
- 更多背离信号
- 包括零线穿越背离
- 假信号率更高
- 仅适合有经验的交易者
#### 价格参考：影线vs实体
**影线（默认）：**
- 使用最高/最低价
- 捕捉所有极值
- 检测到更多背离
- 最适合：大多数交易风格
**实体：**
- 使用开盘/收盘价
- 过滤突刺波动
- 背离更少但更干净
- 最适合：噪音市场、加密货币
#### 视觉设置建议
**新手：**
- 启用：MACD线、信号线、直方图
- 启用：交叉标记
- 启用：直方图颜色
- 禁用：初始禁用两个背离系统
- 重点：先学习基本交叉
**中级：**
- 所有基本组件
- 添加：仅直方图背离
- 使用：同符号要求
- 重点：早期反转信号
**高级：**
- 所有组件
- 两个背离系统
- 每个市场自定义参数
- 多时间框架分析
- 重点：高概率汇合设置
### 指标组合
**与移动平均线（EMA）配合：**
- EMA（21/55/144）显示趋势
- MACD显示动量
- 两者一致时进入
- MACD先转向时退出
**与RSI配合：**
- RSI用于超买超卖
- MACD用于动量确认
- 两者都背离 = 极强信号
- RSI + MACD背离 = 高概率交易
**与成交量配合：**
- 成交量确认MACD信号
- 交叉 + 成交量激增 = 有效突破
- 背离 + 成交量背离 = 强反转
**与支撑/阻力配合：**
- 支撑阻力水平用于进出目标
- 水平处的MACD背离 = 最高概率
- 水平处的MACD交叉 = 强确认
**与Bias指标配合：**
- Bias显示价格相对EMA的偏离
- MACD显示动量
- 两者都背离 = 强大反转信号
- Bias极值 + MACD背离 = 高信念交易
**与OBV配合：**
- OBV显示成交量趋势
- MACD显示价格动量
- OBV + MACD背离 = 成交量不支持价格
- 强反转迹象
**与KSI（RSI/CCI）配合：**
- KSI用于振荡器极值
- MACD用于动量方向
- KSI极值 + MACD背离 = 可能反转
- 全部对齐 = 最大信心
### 常见MACD形态
1. **零线上方看涨交叉**：强上升趋势延续信号
2. **零线下方看跌交叉**：强下降趋势延续信号
3. **零线拒绝**：价格将零线作为支撑/阻力
4. **直方图峰值**：动量高潮，注意反转
5. **双重背离**：两次背离未反转 = 最终反转时非常强
6. **直方图收敛**：直方图变窄 = 趋势失去动力
7. **信号线紧贴**：MACD紧贴信号线 = 盘整，预期突破
### 性能提示
- 从默认设置开始（13/34/9 EMA/EMA）
- 一次测试一个背离系统
- 初始使用同符号要求
- 启用交叉标记以获得清晰信号
- 根据市场波动性调整回溯参数
- 更高时间框架MACD比更低的更可靠
- 结合直方图早期信号与MACD线确认
- 不要交易每个背离 - 等待最佳设置
### 警报条件
虽然没有明确编码，但您可以设置自定义警报：
- MACD向上/向下穿越信号线
- MACD向上/向下穿越零线
- 直方图穿越零线
- 背离标签出现时（使用视觉警报）
---
## Technical Support
For questions or issues, please refer to the TradingView community or contact the indicator creator.
## 技术支持
如有问题，请参考TradingView社区或联系指标创建者。
Scout Regiment - KSI# Scout Regiment - KSI Indicator
## English Documentation
### Overview
Scout Regiment - KSI (Key Stochastic Indicators) is a comprehensive momentum oscillator that combines three powerful technical indicators - RSI, CCI, and Williams %R - into a single, unified display. This multi-indicator approach provides traders with diverse perspectives on market momentum, overbought/oversold conditions, and potential reversal points through advanced divergence detection.
### What is KSI?
KSI stands for "Key Stochastic Indicators" - a composite momentum indicator that:
- Displays multiple oscillators normalized to a 0-100 scale
- Uses standardized bands (20/50/80) for consistent interpretation
- Combines RSI for trend, CCI for cycle, and Williams %R for reversal detection
- Provides enhanced divergence detection specifically for RSI
### Key Features
#### 1. **Triple Oscillator System**
**① RSI (Relative Strength Index)** - Primary Indicator
- **Purpose**: Measures momentum and identifies overbought/oversold conditions
- **Default Length**: 22 periods
- **Display**: Blue line (2px)
- **Key Levels**:
- Above 50: Bullish momentum
- Below 50: Bearish momentum
- Above 80: Overbought
- Below 20: Oversold
- **Special Features**:
- Background color indication (green/red)
- Crossover labels at 50 level
- Full divergence detection (4 types)
**② CCI (Commodity Channel Index)** - Dual Period
- **Purpose**: Identifies cyclical trends and extreme conditions
- **Dual Display**:
- CCI(33): Short-term cycle - Green line (1px)
- CCI(77): Medium-term cycle - Orange line (1px)
- **Default Source**: HLC3 (typical price)
- **Normalized Scale**: Mapped from ±100 to 0-100 for consistency
- **Interpretation**:
- Above 80: Strong upward momentum
- Below 20: Strong downward momentum
- 50 level: Neutral
- Divergence between periods: Trend change warning
**③ Williams %R** - Optional
- **Purpose**: Identifies overbought/oversold extremes
- **Default Length**: 28 periods
- **Display**: Magenta line (2px)
- **Scale**: Inverted and normalized to 0-100
- **Best For**: Short-term reversal signals
- **Default**: Disabled (enable when needed for extra confirmation)
#### 2. **Standardized Band System**
**Three-Level Structure:**
- **Upper Band (80)**: Overbought zone
- Strong momentum area
- Watch for reversal signals
- Divergences here are most reliable
- **Middle Line (50)**: Equilibrium
- Separates bullish/bearish zones
- Crossovers indicate momentum shifts
- Key decision level
- **Lower Band (20)**: Oversold zone
- Weak momentum area
- Look for bounce signals
- Divergences here signal potential reversals
**Band Fill**: Dark background between 20-80 for visual clarity
#### 3. **RSI Visual Enhancements**
**Background Color Indication**
- Green background: RSI above 50 (bullish bias)
- Red background: RSI below 50 (bearish bias)
- Optional display for cleaner charts
- Helps identify overall momentum direction
**Crossover Labels**
- "突破" (Breakout): RSI crosses above 50
- "跌破" (Breakdown): RSI crosses below 50
- Marks momentum shift points
- Can be toggled on/off
#### 4. **Advanced RSI Divergence Detection**
The indicator includes comprehensive divergence detection for RSI only (most reliable oscillator):
**Regular Bullish Divergence (Yellow)**
- **Price**: Lower lows
- **RSI**: Higher lows
- **Signal**: Potential upward reversal
- **Label**: "涨" (Up)
- **Most Common**: Near oversold levels (below 30)
**Regular Bearish Divergence (Blue)**
- **Price**: Higher highs
- **RSI**: Lower highs
- **Signal**: Potential downward reversal
- **Label**: "跌" (Down)
- **Most Common**: Near overbought levels (above 70)
**Hidden Bullish Divergence (Light Yellow)**
- **Price**: Higher lows
- **RSI**: Lower lows
- **Signal**: Uptrend continuation
- **Label**: "隐涨" (Hidden Up)
- **Use**: Add to existing longs
**Hidden Bearish Divergence (Light Blue)**
- **Price**: Lower highs
- **RSI**: Higher highs
- **Signal**: Downtrend continuation
- **Label**: "隐跌" (Hidden Down)
- **Use**: Add to existing shorts
**Divergence Parameters** (Fully Customizable):
- **Right Lookback**: Bars to right of pivot (default: 5)
- **Left Lookback**: Bars to left of pivot (default: 5)
- **Max Range**: Maximum bars between pivots (default: 60)
- **Min Range**: Minimum bars between pivots (default: 5)
### Configuration Settings
#### KSI Display Settings
- **Show RSI**: Toggle RSI indicator
- **Show CCI**: Toggle both CCI lines
- **Show Williams %R**: Toggle Williams %R (optional)
#### RSI Settings
- **RSI Length**: Period for calculation (default: 22)
- **Data Source**: Price source (default: close)
- **Show Background**: Toggle green/red background
- **Show Cross Labels**: Toggle 50-level crossover labels
#### RSI Divergence Settings
- **Right Lookback**: Pivot detection right side
- **Left Lookback**: Pivot detection left side
- **Max Range**: Maximum lookback distance
- **Min Range**: Minimum lookback distance
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Enable regular divergence lines
- **Show Regular Labels**: Enable regular divergence labels
- **Show Hidden Divergence**: Enable hidden divergence lines
- **Show Hidden Labels**: Enable hidden divergence labels
#### CCI Settings
- **CCI Length**: Short-term period (default: 33)
- **CCI Mid Length**: Medium-term period (default: 77)
- **Data Source**: Price calculation (default: HLC3)
- **Show CCI(33)**: Toggle short-term CCI
- **Show CCI(77)**: Toggle medium-term CCI
#### Williams %R Settings
- **Length**: Calculation period (default: 28)
- **Data Source**: Price source (default: close)
### How to Use
#### For Basic Momentum Trading
1. **Enable RSI Only** (primary indicator)
- Focus on 50-level crossovers
- Enable crossover labels for signals
2. **Identify Momentum Direction**
- RSI > 50 = Bullish momentum
- RSI < 50 = Bearish momentum
- Background color confirms direction
3. **Look for Extremes**
- RSI > 80 = Overbought (consider selling)
- RSI < 20 = Oversold (consider buying)
4. **Trade Setup**
- Enter long when RSI crosses above 50 from oversold
- Enter short when RSI crosses below 50 from overbought
#### For Divergence Trading
1. **Enable RSI with Divergence Detection**
- Turn on regular divergence
- Optionally add hidden divergence
2. **Wait for Divergence Signal**
- Yellow label = Bullish divergence
- Blue label = Bearish divergence
3. **Confirm with Price Structure**
- Wait for support/resistance break
- Look for candlestick patterns
- Check volume confirmation
4. **Enter Position**
- Enter after confirmation
- Stop beyond divergence pivot
- Target next key level
#### For Multi-Oscillator Confirmation
1. **Enable All Three Indicators**
- RSI (momentum)
- CCI dual (cycle analysis)
- Williams %R (extremes)
2. **Look for Alignment**
- All above 50 = Strong bullish
- All below 50 = Strong bearish
- Mixed signals = Consolidation
3. **Identify Extremes**
- All indicators > 80 = Extreme overbought
- All indicators < 20 = Extreme oversold
4. **Trade Reversals**
- Enter counter-trend when all aligned at extremes
- Confirm with divergence if available
- Use tight stops
#### For CCI Dual-Period Analysis
1. **Enable Both CCI Lines**
- CCI(33) = Short-term
- CCI(77) = Medium-term
2. **Watch for Crossovers**
- Green crosses above orange = Bullish acceleration
- Green crosses below orange = Bearish acceleration
3. **Analyze Divergence Between Periods**
- Short-term rising, medium falling = Potential reversal
- Both rising together = Strong trend
4. **Trade Accordingly**
- Follow crossover direction
- Exit when lines converge
### Trading Strategies
#### Strategy 1: RSI 50-Level Crossover
**Setup:**
- Enable RSI with background and labels
- Wait for clear trend
- Look for retracement to 50 level
**Entry:**
- Long: "突破" label appears after pullback
- Short: "跌破" label appears after bounce
**Stop Loss:**
- Long: Below recent swing low
- Short: Above recent swing high
**Exit:**
- Opposite crossover label
- Or predetermined target (2:1 risk-reward)
**Best For:** Trend following, clear markets
#### Strategy 2: RSI Divergence Reversal
**Setup:**
- Enable RSI with regular divergence
- Wait for extreme levels (>70 or <30)
- Look for divergence signal
**Entry:**
- Long: Yellow "涨" label at oversold level
- Short: Blue "跌" label at overbought level
**Confirmation:**
- Wait for price to break structure
- Check for volume increase
- Look for candlestick reversal pattern
**Stop Loss:**
- Beyond divergence pivot point
**Exit:**
- Take partial profit at 50 level
- Exit remainder at opposite extreme or divergence
**Best For:** Swing trading, range-bound markets
#### Strategy 3: Triple Oscillator Confluence
**Setup:**
- Enable all three indicators
- Wait for all to reach extreme (>80 or <20)
- Look for alignment
**Entry:**
- Long: All three below 20, first one crosses above 20
- Short: All three above 80, first one crosses below 80
**Confirmation:**
- All indicators must align
- Price at support/resistance
- Volume spike helps
**Stop Loss:**
- Fixed percentage or ATR-based
**Exit:**
- When any indicator crosses 50 level
- Or at predetermined target
**Best For:** High-probability reversals, volatile markets
#### Strategy 4: CCI Dual-Period System
**Setup:**
- Enable both CCI lines only
- Disable RSI and Williams %R for clarity
- Watch for crossovers
**Entry:**
- Long: CCI(33) crosses above CCI(77) below 50 line
- Short: CCI(33) crosses below CCI(77) above 50 line
**Confirmation:**
- Both should be moving in entry direction
- Price breaking key level helps
**Stop Loss:**
- When CCIs cross back in opposite direction
**Exit:**
- Both CCIs enter opposite extreme zone
- Or trailing stop
**Best For:** Catching trend continuations, momentum trading
#### Strategy 5: Hidden Divergence Continuation
**Setup:**
- Enable RSI with hidden divergence
- Confirm existing trend
- Wait for pullback
**Entry:**
- Uptrend: "隐涨" label during pullback
- Downtrend: "隐跌" label during bounce
**Confirmation:**
- Price holds key moving average
- Trend structure intact
**Stop Loss:**
- Beyond pullback extreme
**Exit:**
- Regular divergence appears (reversal warning)
- Or trend structure breaks
**Best For:** Adding to positions, trend trading
### Best Practices
#### Choosing Which Indicators to Display
**For Beginners:**
- Use RSI only
- Enable background color and labels
- Focus on 50-level crossovers
- Simple and effective
**For Intermediate Traders:**
- RSI + Regular Divergence
- Add CCI for confirmation
- Use dual perspectives
- Better accuracy
**For Advanced Traders:**
- All three indicators
- Full divergence detection
- Multi-timeframe analysis
- Maximum information
#### Oscillator Priority
**Primary**: RSI (22)
- Most reliable
- Best divergence detection
- Good for all timeframes
- Use this as your main decision maker
**Secondary**: CCI (33/77)
- Adds cycle analysis
- Great for confirmation
- Dual-period crossovers valuable
- Use to confirm RSI signals
**Tertiary**: Williams %R (28)
- Extreme readings useful
- More volatile
- Best for short-term
- Use sparingly for extra confirmation
#### Timeframe Considerations
**Lower Timeframes (1m-15m):**
- More signals, less reliable
- Use tight divergence parameters
- Focus on RSI crossovers
- Quick entries and exits
**Medium Timeframes (30m-4H):**
- Balanced signal frequency
- Default settings work well
- Best for divergence trading
- Swing trading optimal
**Higher Timeframes (Daily+):**
- Fewer but stronger signals
- Widen divergence ranges
- All indicators more reliable
- Position trading best
#### Divergence Trading Tips
1. **Wait for Confirmation**
- Divergence alone isn't enough
- Need price structure break
- Volume helps validate
2. **Best at Extremes**
- Divergences near 80/20 levels most reliable
- Mid-level divergences often fail
- Combine with support/resistance
3. **Multiple Divergences**
- Second divergence stronger than first
- Third divergence extremely powerful
- Watch for "triple divergence"
4. **Timeframe Alignment**
- Check higher timeframe for direction
- Trade divergences in direction of larger trend
- Counter-trend divergences riskier
### Indicator Combinations
**With Moving Averages:**
- Use EMAs (21/55/144) for trend
- KSI for entry timing
- Enter when both align
**With Volume:**
- Volume confirms breakouts
- Divergence + volume divergence = Stronger
- Low volume at extremes = Reversal likely
**With Support/Resistance:**
- Price levels for targets
- KSI for entry timing
- Divergences at levels = Highest probability
**With Bias Indicator:**
- Bias shows price deviation
- KSI shows momentum
- Both diverging = Strong reversal signal
**With OBV Indicator:**
- OBV shows volume trend
- KSI shows price momentum
- Volume/momentum divergence powerful
### Common Patterns
1. **Bullish Reversal**: All oscillators oversold + RSI bullish divergence
2. **Bearish Reversal**: All oscillators overbought + RSI bearish divergence
3. **Trend Acceleration**: RSI > 50, both CCIs rising, Williams %R not extreme
4. **Weakening Trend**: RSI declining while price rising (pre-divergence warning)
5. **Strong Trend**: All oscillators stay above/below 50 for extended period
6. **Consolidation**: Oscillators crossing 50 frequently without extremes
7. **Exhaustion**: Multiple oscillators at extreme + hidden divergence failure
### Performance Tips
- Start simple: RSI only
- Add indicators gradually as you learn
- Disable unused features for cleaner charts
- Use labels strategically (not always on)
- Test different RSI lengths for your market
- Adjust divergence parameters based on volatility
### Alert Conditions
The indicator includes alerts for:
- RSI crossing above 50
- RSI crossing below 50
- RSI regular bullish divergence
- RSI regular bearish divergence
- RSI hidden bullish divergence
- RSI hidden bearish divergence
---
## 中文说明文档
### 概述
Scout Regiment - KSI（关键随机指标）是一个综合性动量振荡器，将三个强大的技术指标 - RSI、CCI和威廉指标 - 组合到一个统一的显示中。这种多指标方法为交易者提供了市场动量、超买超卖状况和通过高级背离检测发现潜在反转点的多元视角。
### 什么是KSI？
KSI代表"关键随机指标" - 一个综合动量指标：
- 显示多个振荡器，标准化到0-100刻度
- 使用标准化波段（20/50/80）便于一致解读
- 结合RSI用于趋势、CCI用于周期、威廉指标用于反转检测
- 专门为RSI提供增强的背离检测
### 核心功能
#### 1. **三重振荡器系统**
**① RSI（相对强弱指数）** - 主要指标
- **用途**：测量动量并识别超买超卖状况
- **默认长度**：22周期
- **显示**：蓝色线（2像素）
- **关键水平**：
- 50以上：看涨动量
- 50以下：看跌动量
- 80以上：超买
- 20以下：超卖
- **特殊功能**：
- 背景颜色指示（绿色/红色）
- 50水平穿越标签
- 完整背离检测（4种类型）
**② CCI（顺势指标）** - 双周期
- **用途**：识别周期性趋势和极端状况
- **双重显示**：
- CCI(33)：短期周期 - 绿色线（1像素）
- CCI(77)：中期周期 - 橙色线（1像素）
- **默认数据源**：HLC3（典型价格）
- **标准化刻度**：从±100映射到0-100以保持一致性
- **解读**：
- 80以上：强劲上升动量
- 20以下：强劲下降动量
- 50水平：中性
- 周期间背离：趋势变化警告
**③ 威廉指标 %R** - 可选
- **用途**：识别超买超卖极值
- **默认长度**：28周期
- **显示**：洋红色线（2像素）
- **刻度**：反转并标准化到0-100
- **最适合**：短期反转信号
- **默认**：禁用（需要额外确认时启用）
#### 2. **标准化波段系统**
**三层结构：**
- **上轨（80）**：超买区域
- 强动量区域
- 注意反转信号
- 此处的背离最可靠
- **中线（50）**：均衡线
- 分隔看涨/看跌区域
- 穿越表示动量转变
- 关键决策水平
- **下轨（20）**：超卖区域
- 弱动量区域
- 寻找反弹信号
- 此处的背离预示潜在反转
**波段填充**：20-80之间的深色背景，增强视觉清晰度
#### 3. **RSI视觉增强**
**背景颜色指示**
- 绿色背景：RSI在50以上（看涨偏向）
- 红色背景：RSI在50以下（看跌偏向）
- 可选显示，图表更清爽
- 帮助识别整体动量方向
**穿越标签**
- "突破"：RSI向上穿越50
- "跌破"：RSI向下穿越50
- 标记动量转变点
- 可开关
#### 4. **高级RSI背离检测**
指标仅为RSI（最可靠的振荡器）提供全面背离检测：
**常规看涨背离（黄色）**
- **价格**：更低的低点
- **RSI**：更高的低点
- **信号**：潜在向上反转
- **标签**："涨"
- **最常见**：在超卖水平附近（30以下）
**常规看跌背离（蓝色）**
- **价格**：更高的高点
- **RSI**：更低的高点
- **信号**：潜在向下反转
- **标签**："跌"
- **最常见**：在超买水平附近（70以上）
**隐藏看涨背离（浅黄色）**
- **价格**：更高的低点
- **RSI**：更低的低点
- **信号**：上升趋势延续
- **标签**："隐涨"
- **用途**：加仓现有多头
**隐藏看跌背离（浅蓝色）**
- **价格**：更低的高点
- **RSI**：更高的高点
- **信号**：下降趋势延续
- **标签**："隐跌"
- **用途**：加仓现有空头
**背离参数**（完全可自定义）：
- **右侧回溯**：枢轴点右侧K线数（默认：5）
- **左侧回溯**：枢轴点左侧K线数（默认：5）
- **最大范围**：枢轴点之间最大K线数（默认：60）
- **最小范围**：枢轴点之间最小K线数（默认：5）
### 配置设置
#### KSI显示设置
- **显示RSI**：切换RSI指标
- **显示CCI**：切换两条CCI线
- **显示威廉指标 %R**：切换威廉指标（可选）
#### RSI设置
- **RSI长度**：计算周期（默认：22）
- **数据源**：价格源（默认：收盘价）
- **显示背景**：切换绿色/红色背景
- **显示穿越标签**：切换50水平穿越标签
#### RSI背离设置
- **右侧回溯**：枢轴检测右侧
- **左侧回溯**：枢轴检测左侧
- **回溯范围最大值**：最大回溯距离
- **回溯范围最小值**：最小回溯距离
- **显示常规背离**：启用常规背离线
- **显示常规背离标签**：启用常规背离标签
- **显示隐藏背离**：启用隐藏背离线
- **显示隐藏背离标签**：启用隐藏背离标签
#### CCI设置
- **CCI长度**：短期周期（默认：33）
- **CCI中期长度**：中期周期（默认：77）
- **数据源**：价格计算（默认：HLC3）
- **显示CCI(33)**：切换短期CCI
- **显示CCI(77)**：切换中期CCI
#### 威廉指标 %R 设置
- **长度**：计算周期（默认：28）
- **数据源**：价格源（默认：收盘价）
### 使用方法
#### 基础动量交易
1. **仅启用RSI**（主要指标）
- 关注50水平穿越
- 启用穿越标签获取信号
2. **识别动量方向**
- RSI > 50 = 看涨动量
- RSI < 50 = 看跌动量
- 背景颜色确认方向
3. **寻找极值**
- RSI > 80 = 超买（考虑卖出）
- RSI < 20 = 超卖（考虑买入）
4. **交易设置**
- RSI从超卖区向上穿越50时做多
- RSI从超买区向下穿越50时做空
#### 背离交易
1. **启用RSI和背离检测**
- 打开常规背离
- 可选添加隐藏背离
2. **等待背离信号**
- 黄色标签 = 看涨背离
- 蓝色标签 = 看跌背离
3. **用价格结构确认**
- 等待支撑/阻力突破
- 寻找K线形态
- 检查成交量确认
4. **进入仓位**
- 确认后进入
- 止损设在背离枢轴点之外
- 目标下一个关键水平
#### 多振荡器确认
1. **启用全部三个指标**
- RSI（动量）
- CCI双周期（周期分析）
- 威廉指标 %R（极值）
2. **寻找一致性**
- 全部在50以上 = 强劲看涨
- 全部在50以下 = 强劲看跌
- 信号混合 = 盘整
3. **识别极值**
- 所有指标 > 80 = 极度超买
- 所有指标 < 20 = 极度超卖
4. **交易反转**
- 所有指标在极值一致时逆势进入
- 可能的话用背离确认
- 使用紧密止损
#### CCI双周期分析
1. **启用两条CCI线**
- CCI(33) = 短期
- CCI(77) = 中期
2. **观察穿越**
- 绿色线穿越橙色线向上 = 看涨加速
- 绿色线穿越橙色线向下 = 看跌加速
3. **分析周期间背离**
- 短期上升，中期下降 = 潜在反转
- 两者同时上升 = 强趋势
4. **相应交易**
- 跟随穿越方向
- 线条汇合时退出
### 交易策略
#### 策略1：RSI 50水平穿越
**设置：**
- 启用RSI及背景和标签
- 等待明确趋势
- 寻找回调至50水平
**入场：**
- 多头：回调后出现"突破"标签
- 空头：反弹后出现"跌破"标签
**止损：**
- 多头：近期波动低点之下
- 空头：近期波动高点之上
**离场：**
- 出现相反穿越标签
- 或预定目标（2:1风险收益比）
**适合：**趋势跟随、明确市场
#### 策略2：RSI背离反转
**设置：**
- 启用RSI和常规背离
- 等待极端水平（>70或<30）
- 寻找背离信号
**入场：**
- 多头：超卖水平出现黄色"涨"标签
- 空头：超买水平出现蓝色"跌"标签
**确认：**
- 等待价格突破结构
- 检查成交量增加
- 寻找K线反转形态
**止损：**
- 背离枢轴点之外
**离场：**
- 在50水平部分获利
- 其余在相反极值或背离处离场
**适合：**波段交易、震荡市场
#### 策略3：三重振荡器汇合
**设置：**
- 启用全部三个指标
- 等待全部达到极值（>80或<20）
- 寻找一致性
**入场：**
- 多头：三个全部低于20，第一个向上穿越20
- 空头：三个全部高于80，第一个向下穿越80
**确认：**
- 所有指标必须一致
- 价格在支撑/阻力位
- 成交量激增有帮助
**止损：**
- 固定百分比或基于ATR
**离场：**
- 任一指标穿越50水平时
- 或在预定目标
**适合：**高概率反转、波动市场
#### 策略4：CCI双周期系统
**设置：**
- 仅启用两条CCI线
- 禁用RSI和威廉指标以保持清晰
- 观察穿越
**入场：**
- 多头：CCI(33)在50线下方向上穿越CCI(77)
- 空头：CCI(33)在50线上方向下穿越CCI(77)
**确认：**
- 两者都应朝入场方向移动
- 价格突破关键水平有帮助
**止损：**
- CCI反向穿越时
**离场：**
- 两条CCI进入相反极值区域
- 或移动止损
**适合：**捕捉趋势延续、动量交易
#### 策略5：隐藏背离延续
**设置：**
- 启用RSI和隐藏背离
- 确认现有趋势
- 等待回调
**入场：**
- 上升趋势：回调期间出现"隐涨"标签
- 下降趋势：反弹期间出现"隐跌"标签
**确认：**
- 价格守住关键移动平均线
- 趋势结构完整
**止损：**
- 回调极值之外
**离场：**
- 出现常规背离（反转警告）
- 或趋势结构破坏
**适合：**加仓、趋势交易
### 最佳实践
#### 选择显示哪些指标
**新手：**
- 仅使用RSI
- 启用背景颜色和标签
- 关注50水平穿越
- 简单有效
**中级交易者：**
- RSI + 常规背离
- 添加CCI确认
- 使用双重视角
- 更高准确度
**高级交易者：**
- 全部三个指标
- 完整背离检测
- 多时间框架分析
- 信息最大化
#### 振荡器优先级
**主要**：RSI (22)
- 最可靠
- 最佳背离检测
- 适用所有时间框架
- 用作主要决策依据
**次要**：CCI (33/77)
- 添加周期分析
- 确认效果好
- 双周期穿越有价值
- 用于确认RSI信号
**第三**：威廉指标 %R (28)
- 极值读数有用
- 更波动
- 最适合短期
- 谨慎使用以获额外确认
#### 时间框架考虑
**低时间框架（1分钟-15分钟）：**
- 更多信号，可靠性较低
- 使用紧密背离参数
- 关注RSI穿越
- 快速进出
**中等时间框架（30分钟-4小时）：**
- 信号频率平衡
- 默认设置效果好
- 最适合背离交易
- 波段交易最优
**高时间框架（日线+）：**
- 信号较少但更强
- 扩大背离范围
- 所有指标更可靠
- 最适合仓位交易
#### 背离交易技巧
1. **等待确认**
- 仅背离不够
- 需要价格结构突破
- 成交量帮助验证
2. **极值处最佳**
- 80/20水平附近的背离最可靠
- 中间水平背离常失败
- 结合支撑/阻力
3. **多重背离**
- 第二次背离强于第一次
- 第三次背离极其强大
- 注意"三重背离"
4. **时间框架对齐**
- 检查更高时间框架方向
- 顺大趋势方向交易背离
- 逆势背离风险更大
### 指标组合
**与移动平均线配合：**
- 使用EMA（21/55/144）确定趋势
- KSI用于入场时机
- 两者一致时进入
**与成交量配合：**
- 成交量确认突破
- 背离 + 成交量背离 = 更强
- 极值处低成交量 = 可能反转
**与支撑/阻力配合：**
- 价格水平作为目标
- KSI用于入场时机
- 水平处的背离 = 最高概率
**与Bias指标配合：**
- Bias显示价格偏离
- KSI显示动量
- 两者都背离 = 强反转信号
**与OBV指标配合：**
- OBV显示成交量趋势
- KSI显示价格动量
- 成交量/动量背离强大
### 常见形态
1. **看涨反转**：所有振荡器超卖 + RSI看涨背离
2. **看跌反转**：所有振荡器超买 + RSI看跌背离
3. **趋势加速**：RSI > 50，两条CCI上升，威廉指标不极端
4. **趋势减弱**：价格上升时RSI下降（背离前警告）
5. **强趋势**：所有振荡器长时间保持在50上方/下方
6. **盘整**：振荡器频繁穿越50无极值
7. **衰竭**：多个振荡器在极值 + 隐藏背离失败
### 性能提示
- 从简单开始：仅RSI
- 学习时逐渐添加指标
- 禁用未使用功能以保持图表清晰
- 策略性使用标签（不总是开启）
- 为您的市场测试不同RSI长度
- 根据波动性调整背离参数
### 警报条件
指标包含以下警报：
- RSI向上穿越50
- RSI向下穿越50
- RSI常规看涨背离
- RSI常规看跌背离
- RSI隐藏看涨背离
- RSI隐藏看跌背离
---
## Technical Support
For questions or issues, please refer to the TradingView community or contact the indicator creator.
## 技术支持
如有问题，请参考TradingView社区或联系指标创建者。
Strong Candle and Probability Levels Light [SYNC & TRADE]Indicator Description: "Strong Candle and Probability Levels Light "
Core Philosophy: This indicator is not just a collection of random signals. It is a complete trading system built around two core concepts: Strength (Volume-based Candles) and Probability (Fibonacci Levels), synchronized between spot and futures markets to filter out noise and manipulations.
🎯 The "Strong Candle Defense" Strategy
The primary tactic is to enter in the direction of the market's dominant force at an optimal price.
1. Identifying Strength: The indicator identifies "Strong Candles" in real-time — candles with anomalously high volume and significant delta (buyer/seller dominance), confirmed across multiple timeframes. They are marked with circles (blue for bullish, red for bearish) and Z-level labels showing the statistical significance of the move.
2. "Ladder" Entry: We do not chase the market. The strategy is to wait for a pullback (retest) to the body of the strong candle or its key internal Fibonacci levels (38.2%, 50%, 61.8%) for a favorable entry. The position is built in parts ("scaling in") as the bounce is confirmed.
3. Profit-Taking Targets: The main take-profit targets are set at the external Fibonacci extension levels:
First Target: 161.8% — The classic level to secure the first portion of profits.
Second Target: 261.8% (or 227% in Light mode) — The level for capturing extended moves, where the remaining position is exited.
Refined Stop-Loss Rules and Strategy Invalidation Conditions:
Primary Stop-Loss: Placed beyond the extreme of the strong candle (the Fibonacci grid's 0% level). For a long position — below the strong candle's low; for a short position — above its high.
Strategy Invalidation Criterion: The strategy is considered invalidated, and the position should be exited, if the price closes a candle's body beyond the key protective level. This specifically means:
For a Long: A candle closes (the close price) below the low of the strong candle.
For a Short: A candle closes (the close price) above the high of the strong candle.
This criterion, especially on lower timeframes, provides a stricter and more timely signal of a setup failure than a mere wick break.
Alternative Supertrend Stop-Loss: The proprietary Supertrend line can be used as a dynamic trailing stop. The stop-loss is placed behind the Supertrend line, and a candle close beyond this line also signals a trend violation and the need to exit the position.
📊 Unique Automated Fibonacci Grids
Our Fibonacci grids are not the standard, static drawing tool. They are a dynamic profit-taking and management system.
Automatic Plotting: A new grid is automatically drawn on every new strong candle, freeing the trader from manual work.
Smart Management:
Self-Cleaning: When enabled, the grid automatically removes itself after the price has fully "filled" its range (reached the 0% level), preventing chart clutter.
Dynamic Levels: Depending on the selected type (Fibonacci Light, Standard, Extended, Geometric), a different set of internal and external levels is plotted, adapting the tool to various trading styles from scalping to position trading.
Key Difference from Standard Tools: Unlike the basic Fibonacci tool, our grids are an integral part of the trading logic. They are tied to strong candles (high-probability points), update automatically, and act as an execution system for the strategy, not just an analysis tool.
📈 Proprietary Supertrend with Advanced Filtering
We do not use the standard, off-the-shelf Supertrend. Our version is a hybrid algorithm, supercharged with volume analysis.
Dynamic ATR Multiplier: The indicator's multiplier adapts to market conditions. During high volume delta (strong buying/selling pressure), the multiplier increases, making the trend line less sensitive and helping you stay in the trade during strong impulses.
Strong Candle Filter: Supertrend signal changes can be optionally restricted to confirm only on strong candles. This drastically reduces false entries. The trend doesn't change just based on volatility (ATR), but upon confirmation by real strength (volume).
Profit Potential: Combining signals from this filtered Supertrend with the "Strong Candle Defense" strategy allows for precise entry timing in the direction of the major trend, with clear and statistically sound profit targets.
⚙️ Additional Systems for Enhanced Accuracy
Spot & Futures Sync: The indicator compares strength between spot and futures markets. A divergence (e.g., a strong long candle on spot but weakness on futures) is marked as a potential "Manipulation" (X), warning you of an unreliable signal.
Multi-Timeframe Volume Analysis: Delta and volume are analyzed from lower timeframes, providing a more granular picture within a single candle of your current TF.
Supertrend Table: A quick overview of the trend direction across all major timeframes (from 5m to 1W) in a single table.
Conclusion:
The "Strong Candle and Probability Levels Light" indicator is a professional suite for traders who want to trade not just signals, but probabilities. The strategy, built around defending strong candles, combined with unique automated Fibonacci grids and an adaptive Supertrend, provides a clear plan from entry to exit. The use of market synchronization and multi-timeframe volume analysis minimizes noise and false signals, allowing you to focus on high-quality setups.
Hellenic EMA Matrix - PremiumHellenic EMA Matrix - Alpha Omega Premium
Complete User Guide
Table of Contents
Introduction
Indicator Philosophy
Mathematical Constants
EMA Types
Settings
Trading Signals
Visualization
Usage Strategies
FAQ
Introduction
Hellenic EMA Matrix is a premium indicator based on mathematical constants of nature: Phi (Phi - Golden Ratio), Pi (Pi), e (Euler's number). The indicator uses these universal constants to create dynamic EMAs that adapt to the natural rhythms of the market.
Key Features:
6 EMA types based on mathematical constants
Premium visualization with Neon Glow and Gradient Clouds
Automatic Fast/Mid/Slow EMA sorting
STRONG signals for powerful trends
Pulsing Ribbon Bar for instant trend assessment
Works on all timeframes (M1 - MN)
Indicator Philosophy
Why Mathematical Constants?
Traditional EMAs use arbitrary periods (9, 21, 50, 200). Hellenic Matrix goes further, using universal mathematical constants found in nature:
Phi (1.618) - Golden Ratio: galaxy spirals, seashells, human body proportions
Pi (3.14159) - Pi: circles, waves, cycles
e (2.71828) - Natural logarithm base: exponential growth, radioactive decay
Markets are also a natural system composed of millions of participants. Using mathematical constants allows tuning into the natural rhythms of market cycles.
Mathematical Constants
Phi (Phi) - Golden Ratio
Phi = 1.618033988749895
Properties:
Phi² = Phi + 1 = 2.618
Phi³ = 4.236
Phi⁴ = 6.854
Application: Ideal for trending movements and Fibonacci corrections
Pi (Pi) - Pi Number
Pi = 3.141592653589793
Properties:
2Pi = 6.283 (full circle)
3Pi = 9.425
4Pi = 12.566
Application: Excellent for cyclical markets and wave structures
e (Euler) - Euler's Number
e = 2.718281828459045
Properties:
e² = 7.389
e³ = 20.085
e⁴ = 54.598
Application: Suitable for exponential movements and volatile markets
EMA Types
1. Phi (Phi) - Golden Ratio EMA
Description: EMA based on the golden ratio
Period Formula:
Period = Phi^n × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
Phi Power Level (1-8): Power of Phi
Phi¹ = 1.618 → ~16 period (with Base=10)
Phi² = 2.618 → ~26 period
Phi³ = 4.236 → ~42 period (recommended)
Phi⁴ = 6.854 → ~69 period
Recommendations:
Phi² or Phi³ for day trading
Phi⁴ or Phi⁵ for swing trading
Works excellently as Fast EMA
2. Pi (Pi) - Circular EMA
Description: EMA based on Pi for cyclical movements
Period Formula:
Period = Pi × Multiple × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
Pi Multiple (1-10): Pi multiplier
1Pi = 3.14 → ~31 period (with Base=10)
2Pi = 6.28 → ~63 period (recommended)
3Pi = 9.42 → ~94 period
Recommendations:
2Pi ideal as Mid or Slow EMA
Excellently identifies cycles and waves
Use on volatile markets (crypto, forex)
3. e (Euler) - Natural EMA
Description: EMA based on natural logarithm
Period Formula:
Period = e^n × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
e Power Level (1-6): Power of e
e¹ = 2.718 → ~27 period (with Base=10)
e² = 7.389 → ~74 period (recommended)
e³ = 20.085 → ~201 period
Recommendations:
e² works excellently as Slow EMA
Ideal for stocks and indices
Filters noise well on lower timeframes
4. Delta (Delta) - Adaptive EMA
Description: Adaptive EMA that changes period based on volatility
Period Formula:
Period = Base Period × (1 + (Volatility - 1) × Factor)
Parameters:
Delta Base Period (5-200): Base period (default 20)
Delta Volatility Sensitivity (0.5-5.0): Volatility sensitivity (default 2.0)
How it works:
During low volatility → period decreases → EMA reacts faster
During high volatility → period increases → EMA smooths noise
Recommendations:
Works excellently on news and sharp movements
Use as Fast EMA for quick adaptation
Sensitivity 2.0-3.0 for crypto, 1.0-2.0 for stocks
5. Sigma (Sigma) - Composite EMA
Description: Composite EMA combining multiple active EMAs
Composition Methods:
Weighted Average (default):
Sigma = (Phi + Pi + e + Delta) / 4
Simple average of all active EMAs
Geometric Mean:
Sigma = fourth_root(Phi × Pi × e × Delta)
Geometric mean (more conservative)
Harmonic Mean:
Sigma = 4 / (1/Phi + 1/Pi + 1/e + 1/Delta)
Harmonic mean (more weight to smaller values)
Recommendations:
Enable for additional confirmation
Use as Mid EMA
Weighted Average - most universal method
6. Lambda (Lambda) - Wave EMA
Description: Wave EMA with sinusoidal period modulation
Period Formula:
Period = Base Period × (1 + Amplitude × sin(2Pi × bar / Frequency))
Parameters:
Lambda Base Period (10-200): Base period
Lambda Wave Amplitude (0.1-2.0): Wave amplitude
Lambda Wave Frequency (10-200): Wave frequency in bars
How it works:
Period pulsates sinusoidally
Creates wave effect following market cycles
Recommendations:
Experimental EMA for advanced users
Works well on cyclical markets
Frequency = 50 for day trading, 100+ for swing
Settings
Matrix Core Settings
Base Multiplier (1-100)
Multiplies all EMA periods
Base = 1: Very fast EMAs (Phi³ = 4, 2Pi = 6, e² = 7)
Base = 10: Standard (Phi³ = 42, 2Pi = 63, e² = 74)
Base = 20: Slow EMAs (Phi³ = 85, 2Pi = 126, e² = 148)
Recommendations by timeframe:
M1-M5: Base = 5-10
M15-H1: Base = 10-15 (recommended)
H4-D1: Base = 15-25
W1-MN: Base = 25-50
Matrix Source
Data source selection for EMA calculation:
close - closing price (standard)
open - opening price
high - high
low - low
hl2 - (high + low) / 2
hlc3 - (high + low + close) / 3
ohlc4 - (open + high + low + close) / 4
When to change:
hlc3 or ohlc4 for smoother signals
high for aggressive longs
low for aggressive shorts
Manual EMA Selection
Critically important setting! Determines which EMAs are used for signal generation.
Use Manual Fast/Slow/Mid Selection
Enabled (default): You select EMAs manually
Disabled: Automatic selection by periods
Fast EMA
Fast EMA - reacts first to price changes
Recommendations:
Phi Golden (recommended) - universal choice
Delta Adaptive - for volatile markets
Must be fastest (smallest period)
Slow EMA
Slow EMA - determines main trend
Recommendations:
Pi Circular (recommended) - excellent trend filter
e Natural - for smoother trend
Must be slowest (largest period)
Mid EMA
Mid EMA - additional signal filter
Recommendations:
e Natural (recommended) - excellent middle level
Pi Circular - alternative
None - for more frequent signals (only 2 EMAs)
IMPORTANT: The indicator automatically sorts selected EMAs by their actual periods:
Fast = EMA with smallest period
Mid = EMA with middle period
Slow = EMA with largest period
Therefore, you can select any combination - the indicator will arrange them correctly!
Premium Visualization
Neon Glow
Enable Neon Glow for EMAs - adds glowing effect around EMA lines
Glow Strength:
Light - subtle glow
Medium (recommended) - optimal balance
Strong - bright glow (may be too bright)
Effect: 2 glow layers around each EMA for 3D effect
Gradient Clouds
Enable Gradient Clouds - fills space between EMAs with gradient
Parameters:
Cloud Transparency (85-98): Cloud transparency
95-97 (recommended)
Higher = more transparent
Dynamic Cloud Intensity - automatically changes transparency based on EMA distance
Cloud Colors:
Phi-Pi Cloud:
Blue - when Pi above Phi (bullish)
Gold - when Phi above Pi (bearish)
Pi-e Cloud:
Green - when e above Pi (bullish)
Blue - when Pi above e (bearish)
2 layers for volumetric effect
Pulsing Ribbon Bar
Enable Pulsing Indicator Bar - pulsing strip at bottom/top of chart
Parameters:
Ribbon Position: Top / Bottom (recommended)
Pulse Speed: Slow / Medium (recommended) / Fast
Symbols and colors:
Green filled square - STRONG BULLISH
Pink filled square - STRONG BEARISH
Blue hollow square - Bullish (regular)
Red hollow square - Bearish (regular)
Purple rectangle - Neutral
Effect: Pulsation with sinusoid for living market feel
Signal Bar Highlights
Enable Signal Bar Highlights - highlights bars with signals
Parameters:
Highlight Transparency (88-96): Highlight transparency
Highlight Style:
Light Fill (recommended) - bar background fill
Thin Line - bar outline only
Highlights:
Golden Cross - green
Death Cross - pink
STRONG BUY - green
STRONG SELL - pink
Show Greek Labels
Shows Greek alphabet letters on last bar:
Phi - Phi EMA (gold)
Pi - Pi EMA (blue)
e - Euler EMA (green)
Delta - Delta EMA (purple)
Sigma - Sigma EMA (pink)
When to use: For education or presentations
Show Old Background
Old background style (not recommended):
Green background - STRONG BULLISH
Pink background - STRONG BEARISH
Blue background - Bullish
Red background - Bearish
Not recommended - use new Gradient Clouds and Pulsing Bar
Info Table
Show Info Table - table with indicator information
Parameters:
Position: Top Left / Top Right (recommended) / Bottom Left / Bottom Right
Size: Tiny / Small (recommended) / Normal / Large
Table contents:
EMA list - periods and current values of all active EMAs
Effects - active visual effects
TREND - current trend state:
STRONG UP - strong bullish
STRONG DOWN - strong bearish
Bullish - regular bullish
Bearish - regular bearish
Neutral - neutral
Momentum % - percentage deviation of price from Fast EMA
Setup - current Fast/Slow/Mid configuration
Trading Signals
Show Golden/Death Cross
Golden Cross - Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below (bullish signal) Death Cross - Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above (bearish signal)
Symbols:
Yellow dot "GC" below - Golden Cross
Dark red dot "DC" above - Death Cross
Show STRONG Signals
STRONG BUY and STRONG SELL - the most powerful indicator signals
Conditions for STRONG BULLISH:
EMA Alignment: Fast > Mid > Slow (all EMAs aligned)
Trend: Fast > Slow (clear uptrend)
Distance: EMAs separated by minimum 0.15%
Price Position: Price above Fast EMA
Fast Slope: Fast EMA rising
Slow Slope: Slow EMA rising
Mid Trending: Mid EMA also rising (if enabled)
Conditions for STRONG BEARISH:
Same but in reverse
Visual display:
Green label "STRONG BUY" below bar
Pink label "STRONG SELL" above bar
Difference from Golden/Death Cross:
Golden/Death Cross = crossing moment (1 bar)
STRONG signal = sustained trend (lasts several bars)
IMPORTANT: After fixes, STRONG signals now:
Work on all timeframes (M1 to MN)
Don't break on small retracements
Work with any Fast/Mid/Slow combination
Automatically adapt thanks to EMA sorting
Show Stop Loss/Take Profit
Automatic SL/TP level calculation on STRONG signal
Parameters:
Stop Loss (ATR) (0.5-5.0): ATR multiplier for stop loss
1.5 (recommended) - standard
1.0 - tight stop
2.0-3.0 - wide stop
Take Profit R:R (1.0-5.0): Risk/reward ratio
2.0 (recommended) - standard (risk 1.5 ATR, profit 3.0 ATR)
1.5 - conservative
3.0-5.0 - aggressive
Formulas:
LONG:
Stop Loss = Entry - (ATR × Stop Loss ATR)
Take Profit = Entry + (ATR × Stop Loss ATR × Take Profit R:R)
SHORT:
Stop Loss = Entry + (ATR × Stop Loss ATR)
Take Profit = Entry - (ATR × Stop Loss ATR × Take Profit R:R)
Visualization:
Red X - Stop Loss
Green X - Take Profit
Levels remain active while STRONG signal persists
Trading Signals
Signal Types
1. Golden Cross
Description: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below
Signal: Beginning of bullish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with Golden Cross
STOP: Below local low or below Slow EMA
TARGET: Next resistance level or 2:1 R:R
Strengths:
Simple and clear
Works well on trending markets
Clear entry point
Weaknesses:
Lags (signal after movement starts)
Many false signals in ranging markets
May be late on fast moves
Optimal timeframes: H1, H4, D1
2. Death Cross
Description: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above
Signal: Beginning of bearish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with Death Cross
STOP: Above local high or above Slow EMA
TARGET: Next support level or 2:1 R:R
Application: Mirror of Golden Cross
3. STRONG BUY
Description: All EMAs aligned + trend + all EMAs rising
Signal: Powerful bullish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with STRONG BUY or on pullback to Fast EMA
STOP: Below Fast EMA or automatic SL (if enabled)
TARGET: Automatic TP (if enabled) or by levels
TRAILING: Follow Fast EMA
Entry strategies:
Aggressive: Enter immediately on signal
Conservative: Wait for pullback to Fast EMA, then enter on bounce
Pyramiding: Add positions on pullbacks to Mid EMA
Position management:
Hold while STRONG signal active
Exit on STRONG SELL or Death Cross appearance
Move stop behind Fast EMA
Strengths:
Most reliable indicator signal
Doesn't break on pullbacks
Catches large moves
Works on all timeframes
Weaknesses:
Appears less frequently than other signals
Requires confirmation (multiple conditions)
Optimal timeframes: All (M5 - D1)
4. STRONG SELL
Description: All EMAs aligned down + downtrend + all EMAs falling
Signal: Powerful bearish trend
How to trade: Mirror of STRONG BUY
Visual Signals
Pulsing Ribbon Bar
Quick market assessment at a glance:
Symbol Color State
Filled square Green STRONG BULLISH
Filled square Pink STRONG BEARISH
Hollow square Blue Bullish
Hollow square Red Bearish
Rectangle Purple Neutral
Pulsation: Sinusoidal, creates living effect
Signal Bar Highlights
Bars with signals are highlighted:
Green highlight: STRONG BUY or Golden Cross
Pink highlight: STRONG SELL or Death Cross
Gradient Clouds
Colored space between EMAs shows trend strength:
Wide clouds - strong trend
Narrow clouds - weak trend or consolidation
Color change - trend change
Info Table
Quick reference in corner:
TREND: Current state (STRONG UP, Bullish, Neutral, Bearish, STRONG DOWN)
Momentum %: Movement strength
Effects: Active visual effects
Setup: Fast/Slow/Mid configuration
Usage Strategies
Strategy 1: "Golden Trailing"
Idea: Follow STRONG signals using Fast EMA as trailing stop
Settings:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base Multiplier: 10
Timeframe: H1, H4
Entry rules:
Wait for STRONG BUY
Enter on bar close or on pullback to Fast EMA
Stop below Fast EMA
Management:
Hold position while STRONG signal active
Move stop behind Fast EMA daily
Exit on STRONG SELL or Death Cross
Take Profit:
Partially close at +2R
Trail remainder until exit signal
For whom: Swing traders, trend followers
Pros:
Catches large moves
Simple rules
Emotionally comfortable
Cons:
Requires patience
Possible extended drawdowns on pullbacks
Strategy 2: "Scalping Bounces"
Idea: Scalp bounces from Fast EMA during STRONG trend
Settings:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 15, Sensitivity 2.0)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base Multiplier: 5
Timeframe: M5, M15
Entry rules:
STRONG signal must be active
Wait for price pullback to Fast EMA
Enter on bounce (candle closes above/below Fast EMA)
Stop behind local extreme (15-20 pips)
Take Profit:
+1.5R or to Mid EMA
Or to next level
For whom: Active day traders
Pros:
Many signals
Clear entry point
Quick profits
Cons:
Requires constant monitoring
Not all bounces work
Requires discipline for frequent trading
Strategy 3: "Triple Filter"
Idea: Enter only when all 3 EMAs and price perfectly aligned
Settings:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base Multiplier: 15
Timeframe: H4, D1
Entry rules (LONG):
STRONG BUY active
Price above all three EMAs
Fast > Mid > Slow (all aligned)
All EMAs rising (slope up)
Gradient Clouds wide and bright
Entry:
On bar close meeting all conditions
Or on next pullback to Fast EMA
Stop:
Below Mid EMA or -1.5 ATR
Take Profit:
First target: +3R
Second target: next major level
Trailing: Mid EMA
For whom: Conservative swing traders, investors
Pros:
Very reliable signals
Minimum false entries
Large profit potential
Cons:
Rare signals (2-5 per month)
Requires patience
Strategy 4: "Adaptive Scalper"
Idea: Use only Delta Adaptive EMA for quick volatility reaction
Settings:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10, Sensitivity 3.0)
Mid: None
Slow: Delta Adaptive (Base 30, Sensitivity 2.0)
Base Multiplier: 3
Timeframe: M1, M5
Feature: Two different Delta EMAs with different settings
Entry rules:
Golden Cross between two Delta EMAs
Both Delta EMAs must be rising/falling
Enter on next bar
Stop:
10-15 pips or below Slow Delta EMA
Take Profit:
+1R to +2R
Or Death Cross
For whom: Scalpers on cryptocurrencies and forex
Pros:
Instant volatility adaptation
Many signals on volatile markets
Quick results
Cons:
Much noise on calm markets
Requires fast execution
High commissions may eat profits
Strategy 5: "Cyclical Trader"
Idea: Use Pi and Lambda for trading cyclical markets
Settings:
Fast: Pi Circular (1Pi)
Mid: Lambda Wave (Base 30, Amplitude 0.5, Frequency 50)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base Multiplier: 10
Timeframe: H1, H4
Entry rules:
STRONG signal active
Lambda Wave EMA synchronized with trend
Enter on bounce from Lambda Wave
For whom: Traders of cyclical assets (some altcoins, commodities)
Pros:
Catches cyclical movements
Lambda Wave provides additional entry points
Cons:
More complex to configure
Not for all markets
Lambda Wave may give false signals
Strategy 6: "Multi-Timeframe Confirmation"
Idea: Use multiple timeframes for confirmation
Scheme:
Higher TF (D1): Determine trend direction (STRONG signal)
Middle TF (H4): Wait for STRONG signal in same direction
Lower TF (M15): Look for entry point (Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA)
Settings for all TFs:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base Multiplier: 10
Rules:
All 3 TFs must show one trend
Entry on lower TF
Stop by lower TF
Target by higher TF
For whom: Serious traders and investors
Pros:
Maximum reliability
Large profit targets
Minimum false signals
Cons:
Rare setups
Requires analysis of multiple charts
Experience needed
Practical Tips
DOs
Use STRONG signals as primary - they're most reliable
Let signals develop - don't exit on first pullback
Use trailing stop - follow Fast EMA
Combine with levels - S/R, Fibonacci, volumes
Test on demo before real
Adjust Base Multiplier for your timeframe
Enable visual effects - they help see the picture
Use Info Table - quick situation assessment
Watch Pulsing Bar - instant state indicator
Trust auto-sorting of Fast/Mid/Slow
DON'Ts
Don't trade against STRONG signal - trend is your friend
Don't ignore Mid EMA - it adds reliability
Don't use too small Base Multiplier on higher TFs
Don't enter on Golden Cross in range - check for trend
Don't change settings during open position
Don't forget risk management - 1-2% per trade
Don't trade all signals in row - choose best ones
Don't use indicator in isolation - combine with Price Action
Don't set too tight stops - let trade breathe
Don't over-optimize - simplicity = reliability
Optimal Settings by Asset
US Stocks (SPY, AAPL, TSLA)
Recommendation:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 10-15
Timeframe: H4, D1
Features:
Use on daily for swing
STRONG signals very reliable
Works well on trending stocks
Forex (EUR/USD, GBP/USD)
Recommendation:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 15, Sens 2.0)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 8-12
Timeframe: M15, H1, H4
Features:
Delta Adaptive works excellently on news
Many signals on M15-H1
Consider spreads
Cryptocurrencies (BTC, ETH, altcoins)
Recommendation:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10, Sens 3.0)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base: 5-10
Timeframe: M5, M15, H1
Features:
High volatility - adaptation needed
STRONG signals can last days
Be careful with scalping on M1-M5
Commodities (Gold, Oil)
Recommendation:
Fast: Pi Circular (1Pi)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base: 12-18
Timeframe: H4, D1
Features:
Pi works excellently on cyclical commodities
Gold responds especially well to Phi
Oil volatile - use wide stops
Indices (S&P500, Nasdaq, DAX)
Recommendation:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 15-20
Timeframe: H4, D1, W1
Features:
Very trending instruments
STRONG signals last weeks
Good for position trading
Alerts
The indicator supports 6 alert types:
1. Golden Cross
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: GOLDEN CROSS - Fast EMA crossed above Slow EMA - Bullish trend starting!"
When: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below
2. Death Cross
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: DEATH CROSS - Fast EMA crossed below Slow EMA - Bearish trend starting!"
When: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above
3. STRONG BULLISH
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: STRONG BULLISH SIGNAL - All EMAs aligned for powerful uptrend!"
When: All conditions for STRONG BUY met (first bar)
4. STRONG BEARISH
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: STRONG BEARISH SIGNAL - All EMAs aligned for powerful downtrend!"
When: All conditions for STRONG SELL met (first bar)
5. Bullish Ribbon
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: BULLISH RIBBON - EMAs aligned for uptrend"
When: EMAs aligned bullish + price above Fast EMA (less strict condition)
6. Bearish Ribbon
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: BEARISH RIBBON - EMAs aligned for downtrend"
When: EMAs aligned bearish + price below Fast EMA (less strict condition)
How to Set Up Alerts:
Open indicator on chart
Click on three dots next to indicator name
Select "Create Alert"
In "Condition" field select needed alert:
Golden Cross
Death Cross
STRONG BULLISH
STRONG BEARISH
Bullish Ribbon
Bearish Ribbon
Configure notification method:
Pop-up in browser
Email
SMS (in Premium accounts)
Push notifications in mobile app
Webhook (for automation)
Select frequency:
Once Per Bar Close (recommended) - once on bar close
Once Per Bar - during bar formation
Only Once - only first time
Click "Create"
Tip: Create separate alerts for different timeframes and instruments
FAQ
1. Why don't STRONG signals appear?
Possible reasons:
Incorrect Fast/Mid/Slow order
Solution: Indicator automatically sorts EMAs by periods, but ensure selected EMAs have different periods
Base Multiplier too large
Solution: Reduce Base to 5-10 on lower timeframes
Market in range
Solution: STRONG signals appear only in trends - this is normal
Too strict EMA settings
Solution: Try classic combination: Phi³ / Pi×2 / e² with Base=10
Mid EMA too close to Fast or Slow
Solution: Select Mid EMA with period between Fast and Slow
2. How often should STRONG signals appear?
Normal frequency:
M1-M5: 5-15 signals per day (very active markets)
M15-H1: 2-8 signals per day
H4: 3-10 signals per week
D1: 2-5 signals per month
W1: 2-6 signals per year
If too many signals - market very volatile or Base too small
If too few signals - market in range or Base too large
4. What are the best settings for beginners?
Universal "out of the box" settings:
Matrix Core:
Base Multiplier: 10
Source: close
Phi Golden: Enabled, Power = 3
Pi Circular: Enabled, Multiple = 2
e Natural: Enabled, Power = 2
Delta Adaptive: Enabled, Base = 20, Sensitivity = 2.0
Manual Selection:
Fast: Phi Golden
Mid: e Natural
Slow: Pi Circular
Visualization:
Gradient Clouds: ON
Neon Glow: ON (Medium)
Pulsing Bar: ON (Medium)
Signal Highlights: ON (Light Fill)
Table: ON (Top Right, Small)
Signals:
Golden/Death Cross: ON
STRONG Signals: ON
Stop Loss: OFF (while learning)
Timeframe for learning: H1 or H4
5. Can I use only one EMA?
No, minimum 2 EMAs (Fast and Slow) for signal generation.
Mid EMA is optional:
With Mid EMA = more reliable but rarer signals
Without Mid EMA = more signals but less strict filtering
Recommendation: Start with 3 EMAs (Fast/Mid/Slow), then experiment
6. Does the indicator work on cryptocurrencies?
Yes, works excellently! Especially good on:
Bitcoin (BTC)
Ethereum (ETH)
Major altcoins (SOL, BNB, XRP)
Recommended settings for crypto:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10-15, Sensitivity 2.5-3.0)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base: 5-10
Timeframe: M15, H1, H4
Crypto market features:
High volatility → use Delta Adaptive
24/7 trading → set alerts
Sharp movements → wide stops
7. Can I trade only with this indicator?
Technically yes, but NOT recommended.
Best approach - combine with:
Price Action - support/resistance levels, candle patterns
Volume - movement strength confirmation
Fibonacci - retracement and extension levels
RSI/MACD - divergences and overbought/oversold
Fundamental analysis - news, company reports
Hellenic Matrix:
Excellently determines trend and its strength
Provides clear entry/exit points
Doesn't consider fundamentals
Doesn't see major levels
8. Why do Gradient Clouds change color?
Color depends on EMA order:
Phi-Pi Cloud:
Blue - Pi EMA above Phi EMA (bullish alignment)
Gold - Phi EMA above Pi EMA (bearish alignment)
Pi-e Cloud:
Green - e EMA above Pi EMA (bullish alignment)
Blue - Pi EMA above e EMA (bearish alignment)
Color change = EMA order change = possible trend change
9. What is Momentum % in the table?
Momentum % = percentage deviation of price from Fast EMA
Formula:
Momentum = ((Close - Fast EMA) / Fast EMA) × 100
Interpretation:
+0.5% to +2% - normal bullish momentum
+2% to +5% - strong bullish momentum
+5% and above - overheating (correction possible)
-0.5% to -2% - normal bearish momentum
-2% to -5% - strong bearish momentum
-5% and below - oversold (bounce possible)
Usage:
Monitor momentum during STRONG signals
Large momentum = don't enter (wait for pullback)
Small momentum = good entry point
10. How to configure for scalping?
Settings for scalping (M1-M5):
Base Multiplier: 3-5
Source: close or hlc3 (smoother)
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 8-12, Sensitivity 3.0)
Mid: None (for more signals)
Slow: Phi Golden (Phi²) or Pi Circular (1Pi)
Visualization:
- Gradient Clouds: ON (helps see strength)
- Neon Glow: OFF (doesn't clutter chart)
- Pulsing Bar: ON (quick assessment)
- Signal Highlights: ON
Signals:
- Golden/Death Cross: ON
- STRONG Signals: ON
- Stop Loss: ON (1.0-1.5 ATR, R:R 1.5-2.0)
Scalping rules:
Trade only STRONG signals
Enter on bounce from Fast EMA
Tight stops (10-20 pips)
Quick take profit (+1R to +2R)
Don't hold through news
11. How to configure for long-term investing?
Settings for investing (D1-W1):
Base Multiplier: 20-30
Source: close
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³ or Phi⁴)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi or 4Pi)
Visualization:
- Gradient Clouds: ON
- Neon Glow: ON (Medium)
- Everything else - to taste
Signals:
- Golden/Death Cross: ON
- STRONG Signals: ON
- Stop Loss: OFF (use percentage stop)
Investing rules:
Enter only on STRONG signals
Hold while STRONG active (weeks/months)
Stop below Slow EMA or -10%
Take profit: by company targets or +50-100%
Ignore short-term pullbacks
12. What if indicator slows down chart?
Indicator is optimized, but if it slows:
Disable unnecessary visual effects:
Neon Glow: OFF (saves 8 plots)
Gradient Clouds: ON but low quality
Lambda Wave EMA: OFF (if not using)
Reduce number of active EMAs:
Sigma Composite: OFF
Lambda Wave: OFF
Leave only Phi, Pi, e, Delta
Simplify settings:
Pulsing Bar: OFF
Greek Labels: OFF
Info Table: smaller size
13. Can I use on different timeframes simultaneously?
Yes! Multi-timeframe analysis is very powerful:
Classic scheme:
Higher TF (D1, W1) - determine global trend
Wait for STRONG signal
This is our trading direction
Middle TF (H4, H1) - look for confirmation
STRONG signal in same direction
Precise entry zone
Lower TF (M15, M5) - entry point
Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA
Precise stop loss
Example:
W1: STRONG BUY active (global uptrend)
H4: STRONG BUY appeared (confirmation)
M15: Wait for Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA → ENTRY
Advantages:
Maximum reliability
Clear timeframe hierarchy
Large targets
14. How does indicator work on news?
Delta Adaptive EMA adapts excellently to news:
Before news:
Low volatility → Delta EMA becomes fast → pulls to price
During news:
Sharp volatility spike → Delta EMA slows → filters noise
After news:
Volatility normalizes → Delta EMA returns to normal
Recommendations:
Don't trade at news release moment (spreads widen)
Wait for STRONG signal after news (2-5 bars)
Use Delta Adaptive as Fast EMA for quick reaction
Widen stops by 50-100% during important news
Advanced Techniques
Technique 1: "Divergences with EMA"
Idea: Look for discrepancies between price and Fast EMA
Bullish divergence:
Price makes lower low
Fast EMA makes higher low
= Possible reversal up
Bearish divergence:
Price makes higher high
Fast EMA makes lower high
= Possible reversal down
How to trade:
Find divergence
Wait for STRONG signal in divergence direction
Enter on confirmation
Technique 2: "EMA Tunnel"
Idea: Use space between Fast and Slow EMA as "tunnel"
Rules:
Wide tunnel - strong trend, hold position
Narrow tunnel - weak trend or consolidation, caution
Tunnel narrowing - trend weakening, prepare to exit
Tunnel widening - trend strengthening, can add
Visually: Gradient Clouds show this automatically!
Trading:
Enter on STRONG signal (tunnel starts widening)
Hold while tunnel wide
Exit when tunnel starts narrowing
Technique 3: "Wave Analysis with Lambda"
Idea: Lambda Wave EMA creates sinusoid matching market cycles
Setup:
Lambda Base Period: 30
Lambda Wave Amplitude: 0.5
Lambda Wave Frequency: 50 (adjusted to asset cycle)
How to find correct Frequency:
Look at historical cycles (distance between local highs)
Average distance = your Frequency
Example: if highs every 40-60 bars, set Frequency = 50
Trading:
Enter when Lambda Wave at bottom of sinusoid (growth potential)
Exit when Lambda Wave at top (fall potential)
Combine with STRONG signals
Technique 4: "Cluster Analysis"
Idea: When all EMAs gather in narrow cluster = powerful breakout soon
Cluster signs:
All EMAs (Phi, Pi, e, Delta) within 0.5-1% of each other
Gradient Clouds almost invisible
Price jumping around all EMAs
Trading:
Identify cluster (all EMAs close)
Determine breakout direction (where more volume, higher TFs direction)
Wait for breakout and STRONG signal
Enter on confirmation
Target = cluster size × 3-5
This is very powerful technique for big moves!
Technique 5: "Sigma as Dynamic Level"
Idea: Sigma Composite EMA = average of all EMAs = magnetic level
Usage:
Enable Sigma Composite (Weighted Average)
Sigma works as dynamic support/resistance
Price often returns to Sigma before trend continuation
Trading:
In trend: Enter on bounces from Sigma
In range: Fade moves from Sigma (trade return to Sigma)
On breakout: Sigma becomes support/resistance
Risk Management
Basic Rules
1. Position Size
Conservative: 1% of capital per trade
Moderate: 2% of capital per trade (recommended)
Aggressive: 3-5% (only for experienced)
Calculation formula:
Lot Size = (Capital × Risk%) / (Stop in pips × Pip value)
2. Risk/Reward Ratio
Minimum: 1:1.5
Standard: 1:2 (recommended)
Optimal: 1:3
Aggressive: 1:5+
3. Maximum Drawdown
Daily: -3% to -5%
Weekly: -7% to -10%
Monthly: -15% to -20%
Upon reaching limit → STOP trading until end of period
Position Management Strategies
1. Fixed Stop
Method:
Stop below/above Fast EMA or local extreme
DON'T move stop against position
Can move to breakeven
For whom: Beginners, conservative traders
2. Trailing by Fast EMA
Method:
Each day (or bar) move stop to Fast EMA level
Position closes when price breaks Fast EMA
Advantages:
Stay in trend as long as possible
Automatically exit on reversal
For whom: Trend followers, swing traders
3. Partial Exit
Method:
50% of position close at +2R
50% hold with trailing by Mid EMA or Slow EMA
Advantages:
Lock profit
Leave position for big move
Psychologically comfortable
For whom: Universal method (recommended)
4. Pyramiding
Method:
First entry on STRONG signal (50% of planned position)
Add 25% on pullback to Fast EMA
Add another 25% on pullback to Mid EMA
Overall stop below Slow EMA
Advantages:
Average entry price
Reduce risk
Increase profit in strong trends
Caution:
Works only in trends
In range leads to losses
For whom: Experienced traders
Trading Psychology
Correct Mindset
1. Indicator is a tool, not holy grail
Indicator shows probability, not guarantee
There will be losing trades - this is normal
Important is series statistics, not one trade
2. Trust the system
If STRONG signal appeared - enter
Don't search for "perfect" moment
Follow trading plan
3. Patience
STRONG signals don't appear every day
Better miss signal than enter against trend
Quality over quantity
4. Discipline
Always set stop loss
Don't move stop against position
Don't increase risk after losses
Beginner Mistakes
1. "I know better than indicator"
Indicator says STRONG BUY, but you think "too high, will wait for pullback"
Result: miss profitable move
Solution: Trust signals or don't use indicator
2. "Will reverse now for sure"
Trading against STRONG trend
Result: stops, stops, stops
Solution: Trend is your friend, trade with trend
3. "Will hold a bit more"
Don't exit when STRONG signal disappears
Greed eats profit
Solution: If signal gone - exit!
4. "I'll recover"
After losses double risk
Result: huge losses
Solution: Fixed % risk ALWAYS
5. "I don't like this signal"
Skip signals because of "feeling"
Result: inconsistency, no statistics
Solution: Trade ALL signals or clearly define filters
Trading Journal
What to Record
For each trade:
1. Entry/exit date and time
2. Instrument and timeframe
3. Signal type
Golden Cross
STRONG BUY
STRONG SELL
Death Cross
4. Indicator settings
Fast/Mid/Slow EMA
Base Multiplier
Other parameters
5. Chart screenshot
Entry moment
Exit moment
6. Trade parameters
Position size
Stop loss
Take Profit
R:R
7. Result
Profit/Loss in $
Profit/Loss in %
Profit/Loss in R
8. Notes
What was right
What was wrong
Emotions during trade
Lessons
Journal Analysis
Analyze weekly:
1. Win Rate
Win Rate = (Profitable trades / All trades) × 100%
Good: 50-60%
Excellent: 60-70%
Exceptional: 70%+
2. Average R
Average R = Sum of all R / Number of trades
Good: +0.5R
Excellent: +1.0R
Exceptional: +1.5R+
3. Profit Factor
Profit Factor = Total profit / Total losses
Good: 1.5+
Excellent: 2.0+
Exceptional: 3.0+
4. Maximum Drawdown
Track consecutive losses
If more than 5 in row - stop, check system
5. Best/Worst Trades
What was common in best trades? (do more)
What was common in worst trades? (avoid)
Pre-Trade Checklist
Technical Analysis
STRONG signal active (BUY or SELL)
All EMAs properly aligned (Fast > Mid > Slow or reverse)
Price on correct side of Fast EMA
Gradient Clouds confirm trend
Pulsing Bar shows STRONG state
Momentum % in normal range (not overheated)
No close strong levels against direction
Higher timeframe doesn't contradict
Risk Management
Position size calculated (1-2% risk)
Stop loss set
Take profit calculated (minimum 1:2)
R:R satisfactory
Daily/weekly risk limit not exceeded
No other open correlated positions
Fundamental Analysis
No important news in coming hours
Market session appropriate (liquidity)
No contradicting fundamentals
Understand why asset is moving
Psychology
Calm and thinking clearly
No emotions from previous trades
Ready to accept loss at stop
Following trading plan
Not revenging market for past losses
If at least one point is NO - think twice before entering!
Learning Roadmap
Week 1: Familiarization
Goals:
Install and configure indicator
Study all EMA types
Understand visualization
Tasks:
Add indicator to chart
Test all Fast/Mid/Slow settings
Play with Base Multiplier on different timeframes
Observe Gradient Clouds and Pulsing Bar
Study Info Table
Result: Comfort with indicator interface
Week 2: Signals
Goals:
Learn to recognize all signal types
Understand difference between Golden Cross and STRONG
Tasks:
Find 10 Golden Cross examples in history
Find 10 STRONG BUY examples in history
Compare their results (which worked better)
Set up alerts
Get 5 real alerts
Result: Understanding signals
Week 3: Demo Trading
Goals:
Start trading signals on demo account
Gather statistics
Tasks:
Open demo account
Trade ONLY STRONG signals
Keep journal (minimum 20 trades)
Don't change indicator settings
Strictly follow stop losses
Result: 20+ documented trades
Week 4: Analysis
Goals:
Analyze demo trading results
Optimize approach
Tasks:
Calculate win rate and average R
Find patterns in profitable trades
Find patterns in losing trades
Adjust approach (not indicator!)
Write trading plan
Result: Trading plan on 1 page
Month 2: Improvement
Goals:
Deepen understanding
Add additional techniques
Tasks:
Study multi-timeframe analysis
Test combinations with Price Action
Try advanced techniques (divergences, tunnels)
Continue demo trading (minimum 50 trades)
Achieve stable profitability on demo
Result: Win rate 55%+ and Profit Factor 1.5+
Month 3: Real Trading
Goals:
Transition to real account
Maintain discipline
Tasks:
Open small real account
Trade minimum lots
Strictly follow trading plan
DON'T increase risk
Focus on process, not profit
Result: Psychological comfort on real
Month 4+: Scaling
Goals:
Increase account
Become consistently profitable
Tasks:
With 60%+ win rate can increase risk to 2%
Upon doubling account can add capital
Continue keeping journal
Periodically review and improve strategy
Share experience with community
Result: Stable profitability month after month
Additional Resources
Recommended Reading
Technical Analysis:
"Technical Analysis of Financial Markets" - John Murphy
"Trading in the Zone" - Mark Douglas (psychology)
"Market Wizards" - Jack Schwager (trader interviews)
EMA and Moving Averages:
"Moving Averages 101" - Steve Burns
Articles on Investopedia about EMA
Risk Management:
"The Mathematics of Money Management" - Ralph Vince
"Trade Your Way to Financial Freedom" - Van K. Tharp
Trading Journals:
Edgewonk (paid, very powerful)
Tradervue (free version + premium)
Excel/Google Sheets (free)
Screeners:
TradingView Stock Screener
Finviz (stocks)
CoinMarketCap (crypto)
Conclusion
Hellenic EMA Matrix is a powerful tool based on universal mathematical constants of nature. The indicator combines:
Mathematical elegance - Phi, Pi, e instead of arbitrary numbers
Premium visualization - Neon Glow, Gradient Clouds, Pulsing Bar
Reliable signals - STRONG BUY/SELL work on all timeframes
Flexibility - 6 EMA types, adaptation to any trading style
Automation - auto-sorting EMAs, SL/TP calculation, alerts
Key Success Principles:
Simplicity - start with basic settings (Phi/Pi/e, Base=10)
Discipline - follow STRONG signals strictly
Patience - wait for quality setups
Risk Management - 1-2% per trade, ALWAYS
Journal - document every trade
Learning - constantly improve skills
Remember:
Indicator shows probability, not guarantee
Important is series statistics, not one trade
Psychology more important than technique
Quality more important than quantity
Process more important than result
Acknowledgments
Thank you for using Hellenic EMA Matrix - Alpha Omega Premium!
The indicator was created with love for mathematics, markets, and beautiful visualization.
Wishing you profitable trading!
Guide Version: 1.0
Date: 2025
Compatibility: Pine Script v6, TradingView
"In the simplicity of mathematical constants lies the complexity of market movements"
Quantum Rotational Field MappingQuantum Rotational Field Mapping (QRFM):
Phase Coherence Detection Through Complex-Plane Oscillator Analysis
Quantum Rotational Field Mapping applies complex-plane mathematics and phase-space analysis to oscillator ensembles, identifying high-probability trend ignition points by measuring when multiple independent oscillators achieve phase coherence. Unlike traditional multi-oscillator approaches that simply stack indicators or use boolean AND/OR logic, this system converts each oscillator into a rotating phasor (vector) in the complex plane and calculates the Coherence Index (CI) —a mathematical measure of how tightly aligned the ensemble has become—then generates signals only when alignment, phase direction, and pairwise entanglement all converge.
The indicator combines three mathematical frameworks: phasor representation using analytic signal theory to extract phase and amplitude from each oscillator, coherence measurement using vector summation in the complex plane to quantify group alignment, and entanglement analysis that calculates pairwise phase agreement across all oscillator combinations. This creates a multi-dimensional confirmation system that distinguishes between random oscillator noise and genuine regime transitions.
What Makes This Original
Complex-Plane Phasor Framework
This indicator implements classical signal processing mathematics adapted for market oscillators. Each oscillator—whether RSI, MACD, Stochastic, CCI, Williams %R, MFI, ROC, or TSI—is first normalized to a common scale, then converted into a complex-plane representation using an in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) component. The in-phase component is the oscillator value itself, while the quadrature component is calculated as the first difference (derivative proxy), creating a velocity-aware representation.
From these components, the system extracts:
Phase (φ) : Calculated as φ = atan2(Q, I), representing the oscillator's position in its cycle (mapped to -180° to +180°)
Amplitude (A) : Calculated as A = √(I² + Q²), representing the oscillator's strength or conviction
This mathematical approach is fundamentally different from simply reading oscillator values. A phasor captures both where an oscillator is in its cycle (phase angle) and how strongly it's expressing that position (amplitude). Two oscillators can have the same value but be in opposite phases of their cycles—traditional analysis would see them as identical, while QRFM sees them as 180° out of phase (contradictory).
Coherence Index Calculation
The core innovation is the Coherence Index (CI) , borrowed from physics and signal processing. When you have N oscillators, each with phase φₙ, you can represent each as a unit vector in the complex plane: e^(iφₙ) = cos(φₙ) + i·sin(φₙ).
The CI measures what happens when you sum all these vectors:
Resultant Vector : R = Σ e^(iφₙ) = Σ cos(φₙ) + i·Σ sin(φₙ)
Coherence Index : CI = |R| / N
Where |R| is the magnitude of the resultant vector and N is the number of active oscillators.
The CI ranges from 0 to 1:
CI = 1.0 : Perfect coherence—all oscillators have identical phase angles, vectors point in the same direction, creating maximum constructive interference
CI = 0.0 : Complete decoherence—oscillators are randomly distributed around the circle, vectors cancel out through destructive interference
0 < CI < 1 : Partial alignment—some clustering with some scatter
This is not a simple average or correlation. The CI captures phase synchronization across the entire ensemble simultaneously. When oscillators phase-lock (align their cycles), the CI spikes regardless of their individual values. This makes it sensitive to regime transitions that traditional indicators miss.
Dominant Phase and Direction Detection
Beyond measuring alignment strength, the system calculates the dominant phase of the ensemble—the direction the resultant vector points:
Dominant Phase : φ_dom = atan2(Σ sin(φₙ), Σ cos(φₙ))
This gives the "average direction" of all oscillator phases, mapped to -180° to +180°:
+90° to -90° (right half-plane): Bullish phase dominance
+90° to +180° or -90° to -180° (left half-plane): Bearish phase dominance
The combination of CI magnitude (coherence strength) and dominant phase angle (directional bias) creates a two-dimensional signal space. High CI alone is insufficient—you need high CI plus dominant phase pointing in a tradeable direction. This dual requirement is what separates QRFM from simple oscillator averaging.
Entanglement Matrix and Pairwise Coherence
While the CI measures global alignment, the entanglement matrix measures local pairwise relationships. For every pair of oscillators (i, j), the system calculates:
E(i,j) = |cos(φᵢ - φⱼ)|
This represents the phase agreement between oscillators i and j:
E = 1.0 : Oscillators are in-phase (0° or 360° apart)
E = 0.0 : Oscillators are in quadrature (90° apart, orthogonal)
E between 0 and 1 : Varying degrees of alignment
The system counts how many oscillator pairs exceed a user-defined entanglement threshold (e.g., 0.7). This entangled pairs count serves as a confirmation filter: signals require not just high global CI, but also a minimum number of strong pairwise agreements. This prevents false ignitions where CI is high but driven by only two oscillators while the rest remain scattered.
The entanglement matrix creates an N×N symmetric matrix that can be visualized as a web—when many cells are bright (high E values), the ensemble is highly interconnected. When cells are dark, oscillators are moving independently.
Phase-Lock Tolerance Mechanism
A complementary confirmation layer is the phase-lock detector . This calculates the maximum phase spread across all oscillators:
For all pairs (i,j), compute angular distance: Δφ = |φᵢ - φⱼ|, wrapping at 180°
Max Spread = maximum Δφ across all pairs
If max spread < user threshold (e.g., 35°), the ensemble is considered phase-locked —all oscillators are within a narrow angular band.
This differs from entanglement: entanglement measures pairwise cosine similarity (magnitude of alignment), while phase-lock measures maximum angular deviation (tightness of clustering). Both must be satisfied for the highest-conviction signals.
Multi-Layer Visual Architecture
QRFM includes six visual components that represent the same underlying mathematics from different perspectives:
Circular Orbit Plot : A polar coordinate grid showing each oscillator as a vector from origin to perimeter. Angle = phase, radius = amplitude. This is a real-time snapshot of the complex plane. When vectors converge (point in similar directions), coherence is high. When scattered randomly, coherence is low. Users can see phase alignment forming before CI numerically confirms it.
Phase-Time Heat Map : A 2D matrix with rows = oscillators and columns = time bins. Each cell is colored by the oscillator's phase at that time (using a gradient where color hue maps to angle). Horizontal color bands indicate sustained phase alignment over time. Vertical color bands show moments when all oscillators shared the same phase (ignition points). This provides historical pattern recognition.
Entanglement Web Matrix : An N×N grid showing E(i,j) for all pairs. Cells are colored by entanglement strength—bright yellow/gold for high E, dark gray for low E. This reveals which oscillators are driving coherence and which are lagging. For example, if RSI and MACD show high E but Stochastic shows low E with everything, Stochastic is the outlier.
Quantum Field Cloud : A background color overlay on the price chart. Color (green = bullish, red = bearish) is determined by dominant phase. Opacity is determined by CI—high CI creates dense, opaque cloud; low CI creates faint, nearly invisible cloud. This gives an atmospheric "feel" for regime strength without looking at numbers.
Phase Spiral : A smoothed plot of dominant phase over recent history, displayed as a curve that wraps around price. When the spiral is tight and rotating steadily, the ensemble is in coherent rotation (trending). When the spiral is loose or erratic, coherence is breaking down.
Dashboard : A table showing real-time metrics: CI (as percentage), dominant phase (in degrees with directional arrow), field strength (CI × average amplitude), entangled pairs count, phase-lock status (locked/unlocked), quantum state classification ("Ignition", "Coherent", "Collapse", "Chaos"), and collapse risk (recent CI change normalized to 0-100%).
Each component is independently toggleable, allowing users to customize their workspace. The orbit plot is the most essential—it provides intuitive, visual feedback on phase alignment that no numerical dashboard can match.
Core Components and How They Work Together
1. Oscillator Normalization Engine
The foundation is creating a common measurement scale. QRFM supports eight oscillators:
RSI : Normalized from to using overbought/oversold levels (70, 30) as anchors
MACD Histogram : Normalized by dividing by rolling standard deviation, then clamped to
Stochastic %K : Normalized from using (80, 20) anchors
CCI : Divided by 200 (typical extreme level), clamped to
Williams %R : Normalized from using (-20, -80) anchors
MFI : Normalized from using (80, 20) anchors
ROC : Divided by 10, clamped to
TSI : Divided by 50, clamped to
Each oscillator can be individually enabled/disabled. Only active oscillators contribute to phase calculations. The normalization removes scale differences—a reading of +0.8 means "strongly bullish" regardless of whether it came from RSI or TSI.
2. Analytic Signal Construction
For each active oscillator at each bar, the system constructs the analytic signal:
In-Phase (I) : The normalized oscillator value itself
Quadrature (Q) : The bar-to-bar change in the normalized value (first derivative approximation)
This creates a 2D representation: (I, Q). The phase is extracted as:
φ = atan2(Q, I) × (180 / π)
This maps the oscillator to a point on the unit circle. An oscillator at the same value but rising (positive Q) will have a different phase than one that is falling (negative Q). This velocity-awareness is critical—it distinguishes between "at resistance and stalling" versus "at resistance and breaking through."
The amplitude is extracted as:
A = √(I² + Q²)
This represents the distance from origin in the (I, Q) plane. High amplitude means the oscillator is far from neutral (strong conviction). Low amplitude means it's near zero (weak/transitional state).
3. Coherence Calculation Pipeline
For each bar (or every Nth bar if phase sample rate > 1 for performance):
Step 1 : Extract phase φₙ for each of the N active oscillators
Step 2 : Compute complex exponentials: Zₙ = e^(i·φₙ·π/180) = cos(φₙ·π/180) + i·sin(φₙ·π/180)
Step 3 : Sum the complex exponentials: R = Σ Zₙ = (Σ cos φₙ) + i·(Σ sin φₙ)
Step 4 : Calculate magnitude: |R| = √
Step 5 : Normalize by count: CI_raw = |R| / N
Step 6 : Smooth the CI: CI = SMA(CI_raw, smoothing_window)
The smoothing step (default 2 bars) removes single-bar noise spikes while preserving structural coherence changes. Users can adjust this to control reactivity versus stability.
The dominant phase is calculated as:
φ_dom = atan2(Σ sin φₙ, Σ cos φₙ) × (180 / π)
This is the angle of the resultant vector R in the complex plane.
4. Entanglement Matrix Construction
For all unique pairs of oscillators (i, j) where i < j:
Step 1 : Get phases φᵢ and φⱼ
Step 2 : Compute phase difference: Δφ = φᵢ - φⱼ (in radians)
Step 3 : Calculate entanglement: E(i,j) = |cos(Δφ)|
Step 4 : Store in symmetric matrix: matrix = matrix = E(i,j)
The matrix is then scanned: count how many E(i,j) values exceed the user-defined threshold (default 0.7). This count is the entangled pairs metric.
For visualization, the matrix is rendered as an N×N table where cell brightness maps to E(i,j) intensity.
5. Phase-Lock Detection
Step 1 : For all unique pairs (i, j), compute angular distance: Δφ = |φᵢ - φⱼ|
Step 2 : Wrap angles: if Δφ > 180°, set Δφ = 360° - Δφ
Step 3 : Find maximum: max_spread = max(Δφ) across all pairs
Step 4 : Compare to tolerance: phase_locked = (max_spread < tolerance)
If phase_locked is true, all oscillators are within the specified angular cone (e.g., 35°). This is a boolean confirmation filter.
6. Signal Generation Logic
Signals are generated through multi-layer confirmation:
Long Ignition Signal :
CI crosses above ignition threshold (e.g., 0.80)
AND dominant phase is in bullish range (-90° < φ_dom < +90°)
AND phase_locked = true
AND entangled_pairs >= minimum threshold (e.g., 4)
Short Ignition Signal :
CI crosses above ignition threshold
AND dominant phase is in bearish range (φ_dom < -90° OR φ_dom > +90°)
AND phase_locked = true
AND entangled_pairs >= minimum threshold
Collapse Signal :
CI at bar minus CI at current bar > collapse threshold (e.g., 0.55)
AND CI at bar was above 0.6 (must collapse from coherent state, not from already-low state)
These are strict conditions. A high CI alone does not generate a signal—dominant phase must align with direction, oscillators must be phase-locked, and sufficient pairwise entanglement must exist. This multi-factor gating dramatically reduces false signals compared to single-condition triggers.
Calculation Methodology
Phase 1: Oscillator Computation and Normalization
On each bar, the system calculates the raw values for all enabled oscillators using standard Pine Script functions:
RSI: ta.rsi(close, length)
MACD: ta.macd() returning histogram component
Stochastic: ta.stoch() smoothed with ta.sma()
CCI: ta.cci(close, length)
Williams %R: ta.wpr(length)
MFI: ta.mfi(hlc3, length)
ROC: ta.roc(close, length)
TSI: ta.tsi(close, short, long)
Each raw value is then passed through a normalization function:
normalize(value, overbought_level, oversold_level) = 2 × (value - oversold) / (overbought - oversold) - 1
This maps the oscillator's typical range to , where -1 represents extreme bearish, 0 represents neutral, and +1 represents extreme bullish.
For oscillators without fixed ranges (MACD, ROC, TSI), statistical normalization is used: divide by a rolling standard deviation or fixed divisor, then clamp to .
Phase 2: Phasor Extraction
For each normalized oscillator value val:
I = val (in-phase component)
Q = val - val (quadrature component, first difference)
Phase calculation:
phi_rad = atan2(Q, I)
phi_deg = phi_rad × (180 / π)
Amplitude calculation:
A = √(I² + Q²)
These values are stored in arrays: osc_phases and osc_amps for each oscillator n.
Phase 3: Complex Summation and Coherence
Initialize accumulators:
sum_cos = 0
sum_sin = 0
For each oscillator n = 0 to N-1:
phi_rad = osc_phases × (π / 180)
sum_cos += cos(phi_rad)
sum_sin += sin(phi_rad)
Resultant magnitude:
resultant_mag = √(sum_cos² + sum_sin²)
Coherence Index (raw):
CI_raw = resultant_mag / N
Smoothed CI:
CI = SMA(CI_raw, smoothing_window)
Dominant phase:
phi_dom_rad = atan2(sum_sin, sum_cos)
phi_dom_deg = phi_dom_rad × (180 / π)
Phase 4: Entanglement Matrix Population
For i = 0 to N-2:
For j = i+1 to N-1:
phi_i = osc_phases × (π / 180)
phi_j = osc_phases × (π / 180)
delta_phi = phi_i - phi_j
E = |cos(delta_phi)|
matrix_index_ij = i × N + j
matrix_index_ji = j × N + i
entangle_matrix = E
entangle_matrix = E
if E >= threshold:
entangled_pairs += 1
The matrix uses flat array storage with index mapping: index(row, col) = row × N + col.
Phase 5: Phase-Lock Check
max_spread = 0
For i = 0 to N-2:
For j = i+1 to N-1:
delta = |osc_phases - osc_phases |
if delta > 180:
delta = 360 - delta
max_spread = max(max_spread, delta)
phase_locked = (max_spread < tolerance)
Phase 6: Signal Evaluation
Ignition Long :
ignition_long = (CI crosses above threshold) AND
(phi_dom > -90 AND phi_dom < 90) AND
phase_locked AND
(entangled_pairs >= minimum)
Ignition Short :
ignition_short = (CI crosses above threshold) AND
(phi_dom < -90 OR phi_dom > 90) AND
phase_locked AND
(entangled_pairs >= minimum)
Collapse :
CI_prev = CI
collapse = (CI_prev - CI > collapse_threshold) AND (CI_prev > 0.6)
All signals are evaluated on bar close. The crossover and crossunder functions ensure signals fire only once when conditions transition from false to true.
Phase 7: Field Strength and Visualization Metrics
Average Amplitude :
avg_amp = (Σ osc_amps ) / N
Field Strength :
field_strength = CI × avg_amp
Collapse Risk (for dashboard):
collapse_risk = (CI - CI) / max(CI , 0.1)
collapse_risk_pct = clamp(collapse_risk × 100, 0, 100)
Quantum State Classification :
if (CI > threshold AND phase_locked):
state = "Ignition"
else if (CI > 0.6):
state = "Coherent"
else if (collapse):
state = "Collapse"
else:
state = "Chaos"
Phase 8: Visual Rendering
Orbit Plot : For each oscillator, convert polar (phase, amplitude) to Cartesian (x, y) for grid placement:
radius = amplitude × grid_center × 0.8
x = radius × cos(phase × π/180)
y = radius × sin(phase × π/180)
col = center + x (mapped to grid coordinates)
row = center - y
Heat Map : For each oscillator row and time column, retrieve historical phase value at lookback = (columns - col) × sample_rate, then map phase to color using a hue gradient.
Entanglement Web : Render matrix as table cell with background color opacity = E(i,j).
Field Cloud : Background color = (phi_dom > -90 AND phi_dom < 90) ? green : red, with opacity = mix(min_opacity, max_opacity, CI).
All visual components render only on the last bar (barstate.islast) to minimize computational overhead.
How to Use This Indicator
Step 1 : Apply QRFM to your chart. It works on all timeframes and asset classes, though 15-minute to 4-hour timeframes provide the best balance of responsiveness and noise reduction.
Step 2 : Enable the dashboard (default: top right) and the circular orbit plot (default: middle left). These are your primary visual feedback tools.
Step 3 : Optionally enable the heat map, entanglement web, and field cloud based on your preference. New users may find all visuals overwhelming; start with dashboard + orbit plot.
Step 4 : Observe for 50-100 bars to let the indicator establish baseline coherence patterns. Markets have different "normal" CI ranges—some instruments naturally run higher or lower coherence.
Understanding the Circular Orbit Plot
The orbit plot is a polar grid showing oscillator vectors in real-time:
Center point : Neutral (zero phase and amplitude)
Each vector : A line from center to a point on the grid
Vector angle : The oscillator's phase (0° = right/east, 90° = up/north, 180° = left/west, -90° = down/south)
Vector length : The oscillator's amplitude (short = weak signal, long = strong signal)
Vector label : First letter of oscillator name (R = RSI, M = MACD, etc.)
What to watch :
Convergence : When all vectors cluster in one quadrant or sector, CI is rising and coherence is forming. This is your pre-signal warning.
Scatter : When vectors point in random directions (360° spread), CI is low and the market is in a non-trending or transitional regime.
Rotation : When the cluster rotates smoothly around the circle, the ensemble is in coherent oscillation—typically seen during steady trends.
Sudden flips : When the cluster rapidly jumps from one side to the opposite (e.g., +90° to -90°), a phase reversal has occurred—often coinciding with trend reversals.
Example: If you see RSI, MACD, and Stochastic all pointing toward 45° (northeast) with long vectors, while CCI, TSI, and ROC point toward 40-50° as well, coherence is high and dominant phase is bullish. Expect an ignition signal if CI crosses threshold.
Reading Dashboard Metrics
The dashboard provides numerical confirmation of what the orbit plot shows visually:
CI : Displays as 0-100%. Above 70% = high coherence (strong regime), 40-70% = moderate, below 40% = low (poor conditions for trend entries).
Dom Phase : Angle in degrees with directional arrow. ⬆ = bullish bias, ⬇ = bearish bias, ⬌ = neutral.
Field Strength : CI weighted by amplitude. High values (> 0.6) indicate not just alignment but strong alignment.
Entangled Pairs : Count of oscillator pairs with E > threshold. Higher = more confirmation. If minimum is set to 4, you need at least 4 pairs entangled for signals.
Phase Lock : 🔒 YES (all oscillators within tolerance) or 🔓 NO (spread too wide).
State : Real-time classification:
🚀 IGNITION: CI just crossed threshold with phase-lock
⚡ COHERENT: CI is high and stable
💥 COLLAPSE: CI has dropped sharply
🌀 CHAOS: Low CI, scattered phases
Collapse Risk : 0-100% scale based on recent CI change. Above 50% warns of imminent breakdown.
Interpreting Signals
Long Ignition (Blue Triangle Below Price) :
Occurs when CI crosses above threshold (e.g., 0.80)
Dominant phase is in bullish range (-90° to +90°)
All oscillators are phase-locked (within tolerance)
Minimum entangled pairs requirement met
Interpretation : The oscillator ensemble has transitioned from disorder to coherent bullish alignment. This is a high-probability long entry point. The multi-layer confirmation (CI + phase direction + lock + entanglement) ensures this is not a single-oscillator whipsaw.
Short Ignition (Red Triangle Above Price) :
Same conditions as long, but dominant phase is in bearish range (< -90° or > +90°)
Interpretation : Coherent bearish alignment has formed. High-probability short entry.
Collapse (Circles Above and Below Price) :
CI has dropped by more than the collapse threshold (e.g., 0.55) over a 5-bar window
CI was previously above 0.6 (collapsing from coherent state)
Interpretation : Phase coherence has broken down. If you are in a position, this is an exit warning. If looking to enter, stand aside—regime is transitioning.
Phase-Time Heat Map Patterns
Enable the heat map and position it at bottom right. The rows represent individual oscillators, columns represent time bins (most recent on left).
Pattern: Horizontal Color Bands
If a row (e.g., RSI) shows consistent color across columns (say, green for several bins), that oscillator has maintained stable phase over time. If all rows show horizontal bands of similar color, the entire ensemble has been phase-locked for an extended period—this is a strong trending regime.
Pattern: Vertical Color Bands
If a column (single time bin) shows all cells with the same or very similar color, that moment in time had high coherence. These vertical bands often align with ignition signals or major price pivots.
Pattern: Rainbow Chaos
If cells are random colors (red, green, yellow mixed with no pattern), coherence is low. The ensemble is scattered. Avoid trading during these periods unless you have external confirmation.
Pattern: Color Transition
If you see a row transition from red to green (or vice versa) sharply, that oscillator has phase-flipped. If multiple rows do this simultaneously, a regime change is underway.
Entanglement Web Analysis
Enable the web matrix (default: opposite corner from heat map). It shows an N×N grid where N = number of active oscillators.
Bright Yellow/Gold Cells : High pairwise entanglement. For example, if the RSI-MACD cell is bright gold, those two oscillators are moving in phase. If the RSI-Stochastic cell is bright, they are entangled as well.
Dark Gray Cells : Low entanglement. Oscillators are decorrelated or in quadrature.
Diagonal : Always marked with "—" because an oscillator is always perfectly entangled with itself.
How to use :
Scan for clustering: If most cells are bright, coherence is high across the board. If only a few cells are bright, coherence is driven by a subset (e.g., RSI and MACD are aligned, but nothing else is—weak signal).
Identify laggards: If one row/column is entirely dark, that oscillator is the outlier. You may choose to disable it or monitor for when it joins the group (late confirmation).
Watch for web formation: During low-coherence periods, the matrix is mostly dark. As coherence builds, cells begin lighting up. A sudden "web" of connections forming visually precedes ignition signals.
Trading Workflow
Step 1: Monitor Coherence Level
Check the dashboard CI metric or observe the orbit plot. If CI is below 40% and vectors are scattered, conditions are poor for trend entries. Wait.
Step 2: Detect Coherence Building
When CI begins rising (say, from 30% to 50-60%) and you notice vectors on the orbit plot starting to cluster, coherence is forming. This is your alert phase—do not enter yet, but prepare.
Step 3: Confirm Phase Direction
Check the dominant phase angle and the orbit plot quadrant where clustering is occurring:
Clustering in right half (0° to ±90°): Bullish bias forming
Clustering in left half (±90° to 180°): Bearish bias forming
Verify the dashboard shows the corresponding directional arrow (⬆ or ⬇).
Step 4: Wait for Signal Confirmation
Do not enter based on rising CI alone. Wait for the full ignition signal:
CI crosses above threshold
Phase-lock indicator shows 🔒 YES
Entangled pairs count >= minimum
Directional triangle appears on chart
This ensures all layers have aligned.
Step 5: Execute Entry
Long : Blue triangle below price appears → enter long
Short : Red triangle above price appears → enter short
Step 6: Position Management
Initial Stop : Place stop loss based on your risk management rules (e.g., recent swing low/high, ATR-based buffer).
Monitoring :
Watch the field cloud density. If it remains opaque and colored in your direction, the regime is intact.
Check dashboard collapse risk. If it rises above 50%, prepare for exit.
Monitor the orbit plot. If vectors begin scattering or the cluster flips to the opposite side, coherence is breaking.
Exit Triggers :
Collapse signal fires (circles appear)
Dominant phase flips to opposite half-plane
CI drops below 40% (coherence lost)
Price hits your profit target or trailing stop
Step 7: Post-Exit Analysis
After exiting, observe whether a new ignition forms in the opposite direction (reversal) or if CI remains low (transition to range). Use this to decide whether to re-enter, reverse, or stand aside.
Best Practices
Use Price Structure as Context
QRFM identifies when coherence forms but does not specify where price will go. Combine ignition signals with support/resistance levels, trendlines, or chart patterns. For example:
Long ignition near a major support level after a pullback: high-probability bounce
Long ignition in the middle of a range with no structure: lower probability
Multi-Timeframe Confirmation
Open QRFM on two timeframes simultaneously:
Higher timeframe (e.g., 4-hour): Use CI level to determine regime bias. If 4H CI is above 60% and dominant phase is bullish, the market is in a bullish regime.
Lower timeframe (e.g., 15-minute): Execute entries on ignition signals that align with the higher timeframe bias.
This prevents counter-trend trades and increases win rate.
Distinguish Between Regime Types
High CI, stable dominant phase (State: Coherent) : Trending market. Ignitions are continuation signals; collapses are profit-taking or reversal warnings.
Low CI, erratic dominant phase (State: Chaos) : Ranging or choppy market. Avoid ignition signals or reduce position size. Wait for coherence to establish.
Moderate CI with frequent collapses : Whipsaw environment. Use wider stops or stand aside.
Adjust Parameters to Instrument and Timeframe
Crypto/Forex (high volatility) : Lower ignition threshold (0.65-0.75), lower CI smoothing (2-3), shorter oscillator lengths (7-10).
Stocks/Indices (moderate volatility) : Standard settings (threshold 0.75-0.85, smoothing 5-7, oscillator lengths 14).
Lower timeframes (5-15 min) : Reduce phase sample rate to 1-2 for responsiveness.
Higher timeframes (daily+) : Increase CI smoothing and oscillator lengths for noise reduction.
Use Entanglement Count as Conviction Filter
The minimum entangled pairs setting controls signal strictness:
Low (1-2) : More signals, lower quality (acceptable if you have other confirmation)
Medium (3-5) : Balanced (recommended for most traders)
High (6+) : Very strict, fewer signals, highest quality
Adjust based on your trade frequency preference and risk tolerance.
Monitor Oscillator Contribution
Use the entanglement web to see which oscillators are driving coherence. If certain oscillators are consistently dark (low E with all others), they may be adding noise. Consider disabling them. For example:
On low-volume instruments, MFI may be unreliable → disable MFI
On strongly trending instruments, mean-reversion oscillators (Stochastic, RSI) may lag → reduce weight or disable
Respect the Collapse Signal
Collapse events are early warnings. Price may continue in the original direction for several bars after collapse fires, but the underlying regime has weakened. Best practice:
If in profit: Take partial or full profit on collapse
If at breakeven/small loss: Exit immediately
If collapse occurs shortly after entry: Likely a false ignition; exit to avoid drawdown
Collapses do not guarantee immediate reversals—they signal uncertainty .
Combine with Volume Analysis
If your instrument has reliable volume:
Ignitions with expanding volume: Higher conviction
Ignitions with declining volume: Weaker, possibly false
Collapses with volume spikes: Strong reversal signal
Collapses with low volume: May just be consolidation
Volume is not built into QRFM (except via MFI), so add it as external confirmation.
Observe the Phase Spiral
The spiral provides a quick visual cue for rotation consistency:
Tight, smooth spiral : Ensemble is rotating coherently (trending)
Loose, erratic spiral : Phase is jumping around (ranging or transitional)
If the spiral tightens, coherence is building. If it loosens, coherence is dissolving.
Do Not Overtrade Low-Coherence Periods
When CI is persistently below 40% and the state is "Chaos," the market is not in a regime where phase analysis is predictive. During these times:
Reduce position size
Widen stops
Wait for coherence to return
QRFM's strength is regime detection. If there is no regime, the tool correctly signals "stand aside."
Use Alerts Strategically
Set alerts for:
Long Ignition
Short Ignition
Collapse
Phase Lock (optional)
Configure alerts to "Once per bar close" to avoid intrabar repainting and noise. When an alert fires, manually verify:
Orbit plot shows clustering
Dashboard confirms all conditions
Price structure supports the trade
Do not blindly trade alerts—use them as prompts for analysis.
Ideal Market Conditions
Best Performance
Instruments :
Liquid, actively traded markets (major forex pairs, large-cap stocks, major indices, top-tier crypto)
Instruments with clear cyclical oscillator behavior (avoid extremely illiquid or manipulated markets)
Timeframes :
15-minute to 4-hour: Optimal balance of noise reduction and responsiveness
1-hour to daily: Slower, higher-conviction signals; good for swing trading
5-minute: Acceptable for scalping if parameters are tightened and you accept more noise
Market Regimes :
Trending markets with periodic retracements (where oscillators cycle through phases predictably)
Breakout environments (coherence forms before/during breakout; collapse occurs at exhaustion)
Rotational markets with clear swings (oscillators phase-lock at turning points)
Volatility :
Moderate to high volatility (oscillators have room to move through their ranges)
Stable volatility regimes (sudden VIX spikes or flash crashes may create false collapses)
Challenging Conditions
Instruments :
Very low liquidity markets (erratic price action creates unstable oscillator phases)
Heavily news-driven instruments (fundamentals may override technical coherence)
Highly correlated instruments (oscillators may all reflect the same underlying factor, reducing independence)
Market Regimes :
Deep, prolonged consolidation (oscillators remain near neutral, CI is chronically low, few signals fire)
Extreme chop with no directional bias (oscillators whipsaw, coherence never establishes)
Gap-driven markets (large overnight gaps create phase discontinuities)
Timeframes :
Sub-5-minute charts: Noise dominates; oscillators flip rapidly; coherence is fleeting and unreliable
Weekly/monthly: Oscillators move extremely slowly; signals are rare; better suited for long-term positioning than active trading
Special Cases :
During major economic releases or earnings: Oscillators may lag price or become decorrelated as fundamentals overwhelm technicals. Reduce position size or stand aside.
In extremely low-volatility environments (e.g., holiday periods): Oscillators compress to neutral, CI may be artificially high due to lack of movement, but signals lack follow-through.
Adaptive Behavior
QRFM is designed to self-adapt to poor conditions:
When coherence is genuinely absent, CI remains low and signals do not fire
When only a subset of oscillators aligns, entangled pairs count stays below threshold and signals are filtered out
When phase-lock cannot be achieved (oscillators too scattered), the lock filter prevents signals
This means the indicator will naturally produce fewer (or zero) signals during unfavorable conditions, rather than generating false signals. This is a feature —it keeps you out of low-probability trades.
Parameter Optimization by Trading Style
Scalping (5-15 Minute Charts)
Goal : Maximum responsiveness, accept higher noise
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 7-10
MACD: 8/17/6
Stochastic: 8-10, smooth 2-3
CCI: 14-16
Others: 8-12
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 2-3 bars (fast reaction)
Phase Sample Rate: 1 (every bar)
Ignition Threshold: 0.65-0.75 (lower for more signals)
Collapse Threshold: 0.40-0.50 (earlier exit warnings)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 40-50° (looser, easier to achieve)
Min Entangled Pairs: 2-3 (fewer oscillators required)
Visuals :
Orbit Plot + Dashboard only (reduce screen clutter for fast decisions)
Disable heavy visuals (heat map, web) for performance
Alerts :
Enable all ignition and collapse alerts
Set to "Once per bar close"
Day Trading (15-Minute to 1-Hour Charts)
Goal : Balance between responsiveness and reliability
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 14 (standard)
MACD: 12/26/9 (standard)
Stochastic: 14, smooth 3
CCI: 20
Others: 10-14
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 3-5 bars (balanced)
Phase Sample Rate: 2-3
Ignition Threshold: 0.75-0.85 (moderate selectivity)
Collapse Threshold: 0.50-0.55 (balanced exit timing)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 30-40° (moderate tightness)
Min Entangled Pairs: 4-5 (reasonable confirmation)
Visuals :
Orbit Plot + Dashboard + Heat Map or Web (choose one)
Field Cloud for regime backdrop
Alerts :
Ignition and collapse alerts
Optional phase-lock alert for advance warning
Swing Trading (4-Hour to Daily Charts)
Goal : High-conviction signals, minimal noise, fewer trades
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 14-21
MACD: 12/26/9 or 19/39/9 (longer variant)
Stochastic: 14-21, smooth 3-5
CCI: 20-30
Others: 14-20
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 5-10 bars (very smooth)
Phase Sample Rate: 3-5
Ignition Threshold: 0.80-0.90 (high bar for entry)
Collapse Threshold: 0.55-0.65 (only significant breakdowns)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 20-30° (tight clustering required)
Min Entangled Pairs: 5-7 (strong confirmation)
Visuals :
All modules enabled (you have time to analyze)
Heat Map for multi-bar pattern recognition
Web for deep confirmation analysis
Alerts :
Ignition and collapse
Review manually before entering (no rush)
Position/Long-Term Trading (Daily to Weekly Charts)
Goal : Rare, very high-conviction regime shifts
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 21-30
MACD: 19/39/9 or 26/52/12
Stochastic: 21, smooth 5
CCI: 30-50
Others: 20-30
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 10-14 bars
Phase Sample Rate: 5 (every 5th bar to reduce computation)
Ignition Threshold: 0.85-0.95 (only extreme alignment)
Collapse Threshold: 0.60-0.70 (major regime breaks only)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 15-25° (very tight)
Min Entangled Pairs: 6+ (broad consensus required)
Visuals :
Dashboard + Orbit Plot for quick checks
Heat Map to study historical coherence patterns
Web to verify deep entanglement
Alerts :
Ignition only (collapses are less critical on long timeframes)
Manual review with fundamental analysis overlay
Performance Optimization (Low-End Systems)
If you experience lag or slow rendering:
Reduce Visual Load :
Orbit Grid Size: 8-10 (instead of 12+)
Heat Map Time Bins: 5-8 (instead of 10+)
Disable Web Matrix entirely if not needed
Disable Field Cloud and Phase Spiral
Reduce Calculation Frequency :
Phase Sample Rate: 5-10 (calculate every 5-10 bars)
Max History Depth: 100-200 (instead of 500+)
Disable Unused Oscillators :
If you only want RSI, MACD, and Stochastic, disable the other five. Fewer oscillators = smaller matrices, faster loops.
Simplify Dashboard :
Choose "Small" dashboard size
Reduce number of metrics displayed
These settings will not significantly degrade signal quality (signals are based on bar-close calculations, which remain accurate), but will improve chart responsiveness.
Important Disclaimers
This indicator is a technical analysis tool designed to identify periods of phase coherence across an ensemble of oscillators. It is not a standalone trading system and does not guarantee profitable trades. The Coherence Index, dominant phase, and entanglement metrics are mathematical calculations applied to historical price data—they measure past oscillator behavior and do not predict future price movements with certainty.
No Predictive Guarantee : High coherence indicates that oscillators are currently aligned, which historically has coincided with trending or directional price movement. However, past alignment does not guarantee future trends. Markets can remain coherent while prices consolidate, or lose coherence suddenly due to news, liquidity changes, or other factors not captured by oscillator mathematics.
Signal Confirmation is Probabilistic : The multi-layer confirmation system (CI threshold + dominant phase + phase-lock + entanglement) is designed to filter out low-probability setups. This increases the proportion of valid signals relative to false signals, but does not eliminate false signals entirely. Users should combine QRFM with additional analysis—support and resistance levels, volume confirmation, multi-timeframe alignment, and fundamental context—before executing trades.
Collapse Signals are Warnings, Not Reversals : A coherence collapse indicates that the oscillator ensemble has lost alignment. This often precedes trend exhaustion or reversals, but can also occur during healthy pullbacks or consolidations. Price may continue in the original direction after a collapse. Use collapses as risk management cues (tighten stops, take partial profits) rather than automatic reversal entries.
Market Regime Dependency : QRFM performs best in markets where oscillators exhibit cyclical, mean-reverting behavior and where trends are punctuated by retracements. In markets dominated by fundamental shocks, gap openings, or extreme low-liquidity conditions, oscillator coherence may be less reliable. During such periods, reduce position size or stand aside.
Risk Management is Essential : All trading involves risk of loss. Use appropriate stop losses, position sizing, and risk-per-trade limits. The indicator does not specify stop loss or take profit levels—these must be determined by the user based on their risk tolerance and account size. Never risk more than you can afford to lose.
Parameter Sensitivity : The indicator's behavior changes with input parameters. Aggressive settings (low thresholds, loose tolerances) produce more signals with lower average quality. Conservative settings (high thresholds, tight tolerances) produce fewer signals with higher average quality. Users should backtest and forward-test parameter sets on their specific instruments and timeframes before committing real capital.
No Repainting by Design : All signal conditions are evaluated on bar close using bar-close values. However, the visual components (orbit plot, heat map, dashboard) update in real-time during bar formation for monitoring purposes. For trade execution, rely on the confirmed signals (triangles and circles) that appear only after the bar closes.
Computational Load : QRFM performs extensive calculations, including nested loops for entanglement matrices and real-time table rendering. On lower-powered devices or when running multiple indicators simultaneously, users may experience lag. Use the performance optimization settings (reduce visual complexity, increase phase sample rate, disable unused oscillators) to improve responsiveness.
This system is most effective when used as one component within a broader trading methodology that includes sound risk management, multi-timeframe analysis, market context awareness, and disciplined execution. It is a tool for regime detection and signal confirmation, not a substitute for comprehensive trade planning.
Technical Notes
Calculation Timing : All signal logic (ignition, collapse) is evaluated using bar-close values. The barstate.isconfirmed or implicit bar-close behavior ensures signals do not repaint. Visual components (tables, plots) render on every tick for real-time feedback but do not affect signal generation.
Phase Wrapping : Phase angles are calculated in the range -180° to +180° using atan2. Angular distance calculations account for wrapping (e.g., the distance between +170° and -170° is 20°, not 340°). This ensures phase-lock detection works correctly across the ±180° boundary.
Array Management : The indicator uses fixed-size arrays for oscillator phases, amplitudes, and the entanglement matrix. The maximum number of oscillators is 8. If fewer oscillators are enabled, array sizes shrink accordingly (only active oscillators are processed).
Matrix Indexing : The entanglement matrix is stored as a flat array with size N×N, where N is the number of active oscillators. Index mapping: index(row, col) = row × N + col. Symmetric pairs (i,j) and (j,i) are stored identically.
Normalization Stability : Oscillators are normalized to using fixed reference levels (e.g., RSI overbought/oversold at 70/30). For unbounded oscillators (MACD, ROC, TSI), statistical normalization (division by rolling standard deviation) is used, with clamping to prevent extreme outliers from distorting phase calculations.
Smoothing and Lag : The CI smoothing window (SMA) introduces lag proportional to the window size. This is intentional—it filters out single-bar noise spikes in coherence. Users requiring faster reaction can reduce the smoothing window to 1-2 bars, at the cost of increased sensitivity to noise.
Complex Number Representation : Pine Script does not have native complex number types. Complex arithmetic is implemented using separate real and imaginary accumulators (sum_cos, sum_sin) and manual calculation of magnitude (sqrt(real² + imag²)) and argument (atan2(imag, real)).
Lookback Limits : The indicator respects Pine Script's maximum lookback constraints. Historical phase and amplitude values are accessed using the operator, with lookback limited to the chart's available bar history (max_bars_back=5000 declared).
Visual Rendering Performance : Tables (orbit plot, heat map, web, dashboard) are conditionally deleted and recreated on each update using table.delete() and table.new(). This prevents memory leaks but incurs redraw overhead. Rendering is restricted to barstate.islast (last bar) to minimize computational load—historical bars do not render visuals.
Alert Condition Triggers : alertcondition() functions evaluate on bar close when their boolean conditions transition from false to true. Alerts do not fire repeatedly while a condition remains true (e.g., CI stays above threshold for 10 bars fires only once on the initial cross).
Color Gradient Functions : The phaseColor() function maps phase angles to RGB hues using sine waves offset by 120° (red, green, blue channels). This creates a continuous spectrum where -180° to +180° spans the full color wheel. The amplitudeColor() function maps amplitude to grayscale intensity. The coherenceColor() function uses cos(phase) to map contribution to CI (positive = green, negative = red).
No External Data Requests : QRFM operates entirely on the chart's symbol and timeframe. It does not use request.security() or access external data sources. All calculations are self-contained, avoiding lookahead bias from higher-timeframe requests.
Deterministic Behavior : Given identical input parameters and price data, QRFM produces identical outputs. There are no random elements, probabilistic sampling, or time-of-day dependencies.
— Dskyz, Engineering precision. Trading coherence.
Ultimate Crypto Trend & Liquidity Screener v11. Overview & Originality
This script is an advanced, all-in-one screening tool designed specifically to identify high-potential, trend-following opportunities within the cryptocurrency market. While many screeners focus on single conditions, the "Ultimate Crypto Trend & Liquidity Screener" is original in its multi-layered approach, combining seven distinct logical checks into a single, cohesive framework.
Its primary innovation is the calculation of a "Total Score," which quantifies how well an asset conforms to the ideal characteristics of a tradable trend. This allows traders to move beyond simple binary (yes/no) filtering and instead rank the entire market to find the absolute best candidates that match their strategy.
The script is fully compatible with the TradingView Pine Screener, outputting each individual condition and the Total Score as separate columns for powerful, flexible market analysis.
2. Core Concepts & How It Works
This screener is built on the core principles of classic trend-following. It evaluates assets against a comprehensive checklist to ensure they are not only trending, but are also liquid, volatile, and at a strategic entry point.
The script systematically checks for:
Liquidity: Ensures the asset is actively traded with significant dollar volume, which is crucial for minimizing slippage. It checks both the daily turnover and the 30-day average volume.
Trend Confirmation: Utilizes a dual-moving average system (20/50 SMA default) to confirm the underlying trend direction. It also includes an optional filter to ensure the long-term moving average is actively sloping upwards, confirming trend health.
Trend Strength: Employs the Average Directional Index (ADX) to measure the strength of the trend, filtering out weak or choppy price action.
Momentum: Uses the Relative Strength Index (RSI) to confirm that the asset has positive momentum, as strong trends are supported by sustained buying pressure.
Volatility: Measures volatility using the Average True Range (ATR) as a percentage of the price. This ensures the asset has enough movement to be profitable, a key factor in the 24/7 crypto market.
Strategic Entry: Offers a user-selectable "Entry Mode." You can choose between:
Breakout Mode: Identifies assets breaking out to new highs on a surge of volume.
Pullback Mode: Identifies assets already in a strong uptrend that are experiencing a healthy dip to a key moving average, offering a potentially better risk/reward entry.
3. How to Use This Script
This indicator is designed for two primary workflows:
Single-Asset Analysis: When you apply the script to any crypto chart, a detailed diagnostic table will appear in the bottom-right corner. This table provides a real-time checklist, showing true or false for each of the 7 conditions and the final score, allowing for a quick and deep analysis of any individual asset.
Full Market Screening (Recommended):
Open the Crypto Screener on TradingView.
Click the "Filters" button and at the bottom of the menu, select this script ("Ultimate Crypto Trend & Liquidity Screener").
Click the "Columns" button on the screener and add the columns generated by this script, such as "Total Score," "Liquidity OK," "Entry Signal OK," etc.
You can now sort the entire crypto market by "Total Score" to instantly find the strongest candidates, or filter for assets that meet specific conditions (e.g., Total Score > 5 ).
4. Inputs & Customization
All parameters within this script are fully customizable via the "Settings" menu. The default values have been tuned for general use in the crypto market (e.g., faster moving averages, higher volatility thresholds), but you are encouraged to adjust them to fit your specific trading style, preferred timeframes, and risk tolerance.
5. Disclaimer
This tool is designed for educational and analytical purposes to aid in the decision-making process. It does not provide financial advice or guarantee trading success. Past performance is not indicative of future results. Always use this screener in conjunction with your own comprehensive analysis and robust risk management practices. This script is published open-source to encourage community learning and collaboration.
Pro BTB Pour Samadi Indicator [TradingFinder] Back To Breakeven🔵 Introduction
The Pro BTB (Professional Back To Breakeven) strategy is one of the most advanced price action setups, designed and taught by Mohammad Ali Poursamadi, an international Iranian trader and a well-known instructor of financial market analysis.
The main logic of this strategy is based on the natural behavior of the market :
Breakout of a key level: Price moves beyond an important support or resistance.
Retest / Back To Breakeven: Price returns to the broken level.
Continuation of the main trend: Entry at this point allows alignment with the dominant market direction.
To better understand Pro BTB, it is necessary to first know the concept of a Spike. A spike refers to a sudden and powerful movement of price in one direction, usually caused by heavy order flow. Such a move creates an Imbalance between buyers and sellers. Because the market does not have enough time to distribute orders fairly, it leaves an Inefficiency on the chart.
The direct result of this process is the formation of a Fair Value Gap (FVG) a gap between candles that shows trades were not distributed evenly. In simple terms: the spike is the cause, and Imbalance, Inefficiency, and FVG are its consequences.
In practice, Pro BTB works effectively in both bullish and bearish structures. In a Bullish Setup, a bullish spike first breaks a resistance level. Then, when price returns to that same level, a safe and low-risk buying opportunity is created. Conversely, in a Bearish Setup, a bearish spike breaks a support level, and when price comes back to the broken level, it provides the best conditions for a short entry. These two examples illustrate how Pro BTB logic provides precise, low-risk entries in both directions of the market.
🔵 How to Use
The Pro BTB (Back To Breakeven) strategy allows traders to enter precisely after price returns to the breakout level; this way the entry aligns with the natural market flow while risk is minimized. In practice, this method is simple yet powerful: first, identify a valid breakout on a key level, then wait for price to return to that level, and finally, take the entry in the direction of the main trend.
🟣 Bullish Setup
When a bullish spike occurs and a key resistance is broken, price usually returns to the same level. This level, now acting as support, provides the best opportunity for a long entry. In this scenario, the stop-loss is placed behind the breakout candle or slightly below the broken level, and the take-profit target should be defined with at least a 1:2 risk-to-reward ratio. With strong momentum, higher targets can also be considered.
🟣 Bearish Setup
In a bearish scenario, a bearish spike breaks a key support. After the breakout, price usually returns to the same level, which now acts as resistance. This creates the best conditions for a short entry. The stop-loss is placed behind the breakout candle or slightly above the broken level, while the take-profit target is set with a risk-to-reward ratio greater than 1:2.
🟣 General Rules of Pro BTB
To apply Pro BTB correctly, several key rules must be followed :
The breakout must be valid and occur on a key level.
Always wait for the retest; do not enter immediately after the breakout.
Entry should only happen when price touches the broken level and shows candlestick confirmation.
The stop-loss (SL) must be placed behind the breakout candle or the broken level.
The take-profit (TP) must always be at least twice the trade risk.
For higher reliability, the breakout should align with the trend on higher timeframes.
🟣 Six Entry Methods in Pro BTB
For greater flexibility, Pro BTB offers six standard entry methods :
Market Entry : Enter immediately at the breakout level.
Limit Order : Place a limit order on the breakout level.
Stop Order : Enter only after confirmation of continuation.
Confirmation Candle : Enter after a confirmation candle closes on the level.
Pattern Entry : Enter based on candlestick patterns such as Pin Bar or Engulfing.
Zone Entry : Enter from a zone instead of an exact point to account for market noise.
🔵 Setting
🟣 Spike Filter | Movement
Minimum Spike Bars : Defines the minimum number of consecutive candles required for a valid spike.
Movement Power : Enables or disables the momentum-based spike filter.
Movement Power Level : Sets the strength threshold; higher values filter out weaker moves and only detect strong spikes.
🟣 Spike Filter | Gap
Gap Filter : Enables or disables the gap filter.
Gap Type : Selects which type of gap should be detected (All Gaps, Significant, Structural, Major).
🟣 Spike Filter | Doji
Doji Tolerance : Defines whether doji candles are allowed within a spike.
Max Doji Body Ratio : Maximum ratio of body-to-total candle size for classifying a candle as a doji.
Max Doji in Spike Ratio : Maximum percentage of doji candles allowed within a spike.
🟣 Position Management
Stop-Loss Threshold : Enables or disables the stop-loss threshold feature.
Stop-Loss Threshold Value : Defines the value of the stop-loss threshold for risk management.
Risk-Reward Ratio : Sets the desired risk-to-reward ratio (e.g., 1:1 or 1:2).
Include SL Threshold in R:R : Determines whether the stop-loss threshold is included in risk-to-reward calculations.
🟣 Display Settings
Display Mode : Chooses between Setup (showing setups) or Signal (showing trade signals).
Show Entry Levels: Displays entry levels on the chart (buy/sell zones) when enabled
Only Display the Last Position : Displays only the most recent position on the chart when enabled.
Setup Width Drawing : Adjusts the visual width of the setup drawings on the chart for better visibility.
🟣 Alert
Alert : Enables alert notifications. When turned on, you can set TradingView alerts to receive notifications once the setup or signal conditions are met
🔵 Conclusion
The Pro BTB (Back To Breakeven) strategy is a smart and structured entry method based on natural market behavior after a breakout and retest of the broken level. It helps traders avoid emotional, high-risk entries by waiting for market confirmation and entering precisely at a point that aligns with the main trend and sits closest to the key level.
The simplicity of its rules, flexibility in entry methods, and a risk-to-reward ratio above 2 have made Pro BTB one of the most popular tools among price action traders. Nevertheless, as with any strategy, it is recommended to practice it in demo accounts or through personal backtesting before applying it to real trading, in order to find the entry conditions that best suit your trading style.
Deviation Rate Crash SignalDescription
This indicator provides entry signals for contrarian trades that aim to capture rebounds after sharp declines, such as during market crashes.
A signal is triggered when the deviation rate from the 25-day moving average falls below -25% (default setting). On the chart, a red circle is displayed below the candlestick to indicate the signal.
Backtest (2000–2024, Nikkei 225 stocks):
Win rate: 64.73%
Payoff ratio: 1.141
Probability of ruin: 0.0% (with proper risk control)
Trading Rules (Long only):
Entry: Market buy at next day’s open when the closing price is 25% or more below the 25-day MA.
Exit: Market sell at next day’s open when:
The closing price is 10% above the entry price (take profit), or
The closing price is 10% below the entry price (stop loss), or
40 days have passed since entry.
Notes:
This indicator is tuned for crisis periods (e.g., 2008 Lehman Shock, 2011 Great East Japan Earthquake, 2020 COVID-19 crash, 2024 Yen carry trade reversal).
In normal market conditions, signals will be rare.
Pine Screener BETA Support:
Add this indicator to your favorites and scan with long condition = true.
Screener results display both the MA deviation rate and current price.
When multiple signals occur, use the deviation rate as a reference to prioritize setups.
説明
このインジケーターは、暴落時など短期間で急落した銘柄のリバウンドを狙う逆張りトレードのエントリーシグナルを提供します。
25日移動平均線からの乖離率が -25% を下回ったときにシグナルが点灯します（初期設定）。シグナルはメインチャートのローソク足の下に赤い丸印で表示されます。
バックテスト結果（2000～2024年、日経225銘柄）:
勝率: 64.73%
ペイオフレシオ: 1.141
破産確率: 0.0%（適切なリスク管理を行った場合）
トレードルール（買いのみ）:
エントリー: 終値が25日移動平均線から25%以上下方乖離した場合、翌日の寄り付きで成行買い。
手仕舞い: 翌日の寄り付きで成行売り（以下のいずれかの条件を満たした場合）
終値が買値より10%以上上昇（利確）
終値が買値より10%以上下落（損切り）
エントリーから40日経過
注意点:
このインジケーターは、2008年リーマンショック、2011年東日本大震災、2020年コロナショック、2024年円キャリートレード巻き戻しショックなど、危機的局面で効果を発揮するように調整されています。
通常の相場ではシグナルはほとんど出現しません。
Pine Screener BETA 対応:
このインジケーターをお気に入り登録し、long condition = true をフィルター条件にしてスキャンしてください。
スクリーナー結果には移動平均乖離率と現在値が表示されます。
シグナルが同時に多数出現した場合は、移動平均乖離率を参考に優先順位をつけてください。
SP2L Pour Samadi Indicator [TradingFinder] Spike 2 Legs PA🔵 Introduction
The SP2L (Spike–2Leg) strategy, designed by Mohammad Ali Poursamadi, an international Iranian trader, is a simple yet powerful price action setup developed to identify precise entry points following sharp market movements.
A Spike refers to a sudden and rapid move in the market, usually triggered by a heavy flow of orders in one direction. This sharp movement creates an Imbalance between buyers and sellers. Since the market does not have time to trade evenly during such moves, it generates Inefficiency on the chart.
The direct result of a spike is usually the formation of a Fair Value Gap (FVG) — a space between candles indicating that trades were not distributed fairly. In simple terms, the spike is the cause, while Imbalance, Inefficiency, and FVG are its consequences.
🟣 How is a Spike formed?
Big Movement : A spike begins with a sharp and powerful move caused by heavy order flow in one direction.
Imbalance : This move disrupts the balance between buyers and sellers.
Inefficiency : Due to the speed of the move, the market fails to trade efficiently, leaving inefficiency on the chart.
Fair Value Gap (FVG) : The final outcome is a price gap between candles, highlighting unfair distribution of trades.
In SP2L, entries occur right after a spike. The entry logic is based on the structure of each candle’s Higher Lows (HLs) or Lower Highs (LHs).
When a spike occurs and candles consecutively form higher lows or lower highs :
In bullish conditions, each previous low becomes a potential Buy Entry.
In bearish conditions, each previous high becomes a potential Sell Entry.
🔵 How to Use
In the SP2L strategy, entries occur directly within the ongoing strong movement (the spike). A spike forms when heavy order flow pushes the market strongly in one direction, creating several large candles in sequence. This disrupts balance and leaves patterns such as Imbalance and FVG on the chart.
During such moves, the market does not necessarily retrace; instead, it continues strongly in the direction of the spike. The key principle in SP2L is that candles begin forming Higher Lows (HLs) in a bullish spike or Lower Highs (LHs) in a bearish spike. Each HL or LH acts as a potential entry level, but the actual entry only triggers once price returns to retest that level. This allows the trader to enter within a powerful wave while keeping stop-losses clear and risk controlled.
🟣 Bullish SP2L
When a bullish spike occurs, candles consecutively form Higher Lows. Each HL marks a potential entry. The entry is activated when price returns to that HL.
Stop-Loss (SL) : Placed below the candle where the spike originated, usually the lowest point before the sharp move.
Take-Profit (TP) : Defined based on classic risk-to-reward ratios, commonly TP1 = 1:1 and TP2 = 1:2. Stronger trends may allow extended targets.
🟣 Bearish SP2L
When a bearish spike occurs, candles consecutively form Lower Highs. Each LH marks a potential sell entry. The entry is triggered when price returns to retest that LH.
Stop-Loss (SL) : Placed above the candle where the bearish spike started, usually the highest point before the sharp drop.
Take-Profit (TP) : Similar to bullish setups, typically TP1 = 1:1 and TP2 = 1:2, with extended targets possible if bearish momentum continues.
🔵 Settings
🟣 Spike Filter | Movement
Minimum Spike Bars : Defines the minimum number of consecutive candles required for a valid spike.
Movement Power : Enables or disables the momentum-based spike filter.
Movement Power Level : Sets the strength threshold; higher values filter out weaker moves and only detect strong spikes.
🟣 Spike Filter | Gap
Gap Filter : Enables or disables the gap filter.
Gap Type : Selects which type of gap should be detected (All Gaps, Significant, Structural, Major).
🟣 Spike Filter | Doji
Doji Tolerance : Defines whether doji candles are allowed within a spike.
Max Doji Body Ratio : Maximum ratio of body-to-total candle size for classifying a candle as a doji.
Max Doji in Spike Ratio : Maximum percentage of doji candles allowed within a spike.
🟣 Trend Detection
Trend Detection : Enables or disables the trend detection module using dojis.
Max Doji Body Ratio : Maximum body-to-candle ratio used to classify a doji in trend calculations.
Candle Lookback : Number of candles used to calculate doji percentage for trend evaluation.
Max Doji in Trend Ratio : Maximum percentage of doji candles allowed within the lookback window for the trend to be valid.
🟣 Position Management
Stop-Loss Threshold : Enables or disables the stop-loss threshold feature.
Stop-Loss Threshold Value : Defines the value of the stop-loss threshold for risk management.
Risk-Reward Ratio : Sets the desired risk-to-reward ratio (e.g., 1:1 or 1:2).
Include SL Threshold in R:R : Determines whether the stop-loss threshold is included in risk-to-reward calculations.
🟣 Display Settings
Display Mode : Chooses between Setup (showing setups) or Signal (showing trade signals).
Only Display the Last Position : Displays only the most recent position on the chart when enabled.
🔵 Conclusion
The SP2L (Spike–2Leg) strategy, designed by Mohammad Ali Poursamadi, offers a simple yet effective framework for trading strong market flows. Built on the logic of spikes and candle structures (HLs and LHs), it identifies precise entry points directly within the main movement of the market, where risk is clear and reward is logical.
With transparent rules, defined stop-loss placement, and flexible risk management, SP2L proves especially effective in volatile markets such as forex, gold, and indices. Its simplicity makes it practical for both beginner traders and seasoned professionals.
In summary, SP2L helps traders avoid unnecessary complexity by focusing on spikes and consecutive HL/LH formations to capture accurate, low-risk entries.
Cnagda Liquidit Trading SystemCnagda Liquidit Trading System helps spot where price is likely to trap traders and reverse, then gives simple, actionable Level to entry, place SL, and take profits with confidence. It blends imbalance zones, trend bias, order blocks, liquidity pools, high-probability fake Signal, and context-aware candle patterns into one clean workflow.
🟩🟥 Imbalance boxes: “Crowd rushed, gaps left”
What it is: Green/red boxes mark fast, one-sided moves where price “skipped” orders—think FVG-like zones that often get revisited.
Why it helps: Price frequently pulls back to “fill” these zones, creating clean retest entries with logical stops.
⏩How to use:
Green box = potential demand retest; Red box = potential supply retest. Enter on pullback into box, not on first impulse. Put stop on far side of box and aim first targets at recent swing points.
↕️ Swing bias (HH/HL vs LH/LL): “Which way is the road?”
What it is: Higher-highs/higher-lows = up-bias; Lower-highs/lower-lows = down-bias. system plots Buy/Sell OB levels aligned with that bias.
Why it helps: Trading with the broader flow reduces “hero trades” against institutions. Bias gives clearer entries and cleaner drawdowns.
⏩How to use:
Up-bias: look for long on Buy OB retests. Down-bias: look for short on Sell OB retests. Wait for a small rejection/engulfing to confirm before triggering.
🧱Order blocks: “Where big players remember”
What it is: last opposite-colored candle before an impulsive move—these zones often hold memory and reaction. system plots these as Buy/Sell OB lines.
Why it helps: Many breakouts pull back to the origin. Good entries often happen on retest, not on the breakout chase.
⏩ How to use:
Let price return into the OB, show wick rejection, and decent volume. Enter with stop beyond OB; define risk-reward before entry.
📊Volume coloring: “How Volume is move?”
What it is: Bar color reflects relative volume; inside bars are black. The dashboard also shows Volume and “Volume vs Prev.”
Why it helps: Patterns without volume often fade; volume validates strength and intent of moves.
⏩ How to use:
Favor entries where imbalance/OB/liquidity-grab coincide with higher volume. If volume is weak, reduce size or skip.
🧲 BSL/SSL liquidity pools: “Fishing for stops”
What it is: Equal highs cluster stops above (BSL); equal lows cluster stops below (SSL). system plots these and highlights the nearest one (“magnet”).
Why it helps: Price often sweeps these pools to trigger stops before reversing. This is a prime trap-reversal location.
⏩ How to use:
Watch nearest BSL/SSL. If price wicks through and closes back inside, anticipate a reversal. Trade reaction, not first poke. When price closes beyond, consider that pool mitigated and move on.
🟢🔴 Advanced liquidity grab: “Catch fakeout”
What it is: Bullish grab = makes a new low beyond a prior low but closes back above it, with a long lower wick, small body, and higher volume. Bearish is mirror. Labeled automatically.
Why it helps: It exposes trap moves (stop hunts) and often precedes true direction.
⏩ How to use:
Best when it aligns with a nearby imbalance/OB and supportive volume. Enter on reversal candle break or on retest. Stop goes beyond sweep wick.
🧠 Smart candlestick patterns (only in right place)
What it is: Engulfing, Hammer, Shooting Star, Hanging Man, Doji (with high volume), Morning/Evening Star, Piercing—but marked “effective” only if context (swing/trend/location) agrees.
Why it helps: same pattern in the wrong place is noise; in the right place, it’s signal.
⏩ How to use:
Location first (BSL/SSL/OB/imbalance), then pattern. Treat pattern as trigger/confirmation—one fresh label shows to keep chart clean.
🧭 Dashboard: “Context in a glance”
⏩ Reversal Level: current swing anchor—expect turns or reactions nearby; great for alerts and planning.
⏩ Volume vs Prev + Volume: Strength meter for signal candle—higher adds conviction.
⏩ Nearest Pool: next “magnet” area—look for sweeps/rejections there.
🧩Step-by-step trading flow (with mindset)
⏩ Set bias: HH/HL = long bias, LH/LL = short bias. Counter-trend only on clean sweeps with strong confirmation.
⏩ Find magnet: Check Nearest Pool (BSL/SSL). Focus attention there; it saves screen time.
⏩ Wait for event: Look for a sweep/grab label, or sharp rejection at pool/OB/imbalance. Avoid FOMO.
⏩ Add confluence: Stack 2–3 of these—imbalance box, OB, contextual pattern, supportive volume.
⏩Plan entry: Bullish: trigger above reversal candle high or take retest of FVG/OB. Stop below sweep wick/zone. Target at least 1:1.5–1:2.
Bearish: mirror above.
⏩Manage smartly: Take partials, move to breakeven or trail thoughtfully. Don’t drag stops inside zone out of emotion.
🎛️ Parameter tuning (to reduce human error)
⏩ swingLen: Smaller = faster but noisier; larger = cleaner but slower. Backtest first, then go live.
⏩ Tolerance (ATR or percent): ATR tolerance adapts to volatility (good for fast markets and lower TFs). Start around 0.15–0.30. In calm markets, try percent 0.05–0.15%.
⏩ minBarsGap: Start with 3–5 so equal highs/lows are truly equal—reduces false pools.
❌Common mistakes → ✅ Better habits
⏩Chasing every breakout → Wait for sweep/rejection, then confirm.
⏩Ignoring volume → Validate strength; cut size or skip on weak volume.
⏩Losing history of pools → If reviewing/backtesting, keep mitigated pools visible (dashed/faded).
⏩Over-tight tolerance/too small swingLen → Increases false signals; backtest to find balance.
📝 checklist (before entry)
⏩ Is there a nearby BSL/SSL and did a sweep/grab happen there?
⏩ Is there a close imbalance/OB that price can retest?
⏩ Do we have an effective pattern plus supportive volume?
⏩Is the stop beyond the wick/zone and RR ≥ 1:1.5?
•?((¯°·._.• 🎀 𝐻𝒶𝓅𝓅𝓎 𝒯𝓇𝒶𝒹𝒾𝓃𝑔 🎀 •._.·°¯((?•
CVD Divergence & Volume ProfileThis Pine Script indicator, named "CVD Divergence & Volume Profile," is designed to identify potential trading opportunities by combining Cumulative Volume Delta (CVD) divergence with Volume Profile levels and an optional Simple Moving Average (SMA) trend filter. It plots signals directly on the price chart.
Here's a breakdown of what each component does and how to potentially trade with it:
1. Cumulative Volume Delta (CVD) Divergence
What it does: CVD measures the cumulative difference between buying and selling volume. A rising CVD indicates more buying pressure, while a falling CVD indicates more selling pressure. Divergence occurs when the price action contradicts the CVD's direction, suggesting a potential shift in momentum or trend reversal.
Bearish Divergence: The price makes a higher high, but the CVD makes a lower high (or fails to make a new high). This suggests that despite the price increasing, the underlying buying pressure is weakening.
Bullish Divergence: The price makes a lower low, but the CVD makes a higher low (or fails to make a new low). This suggests that despite the price decreasing, the underlying selling pressure is weakening.
Visualization:
Red triangle pointing down on the chart indicates a Bearish Divergence signal.
Green triangle pointing up on the chart indicates a Bullish Divergence signal.
2. Volume Profile Levels (VAH, VAL, POC)
What it does: The indicator calculates simplified Volume Profile levels over a user-defined vp_range (number of candles). These levels represent areas where significant trading activity has occurred:
VAH (Value Area High): The upper boundary of the "Value Area," where 70% of the volume traded.
VAL (Value Area Low): The lower boundary of the "Value Area," where 70% of the volume traded.
POC (Point of Control): The price level within the vp_range where the most volume was traded.
Significance: These levels often act as significant support and resistance zones.
Visualization:
Orange lines for VAH and VAL.
Yellow line for POC.
Zone Proximity (zone_thresh): The indicator only generates divergence signals if the current close price is within a specified percentage zone_thresh of either VAH, VAL, or POC. This filters signals to areas of high liquidity and potential turning points.
3. Trend Filter (SMA)
What it does: This is an optional filter (use_trend_filter) that uses a Simple Moving Average (sma_period, default 200).
Significance: It helps ensure that divergence signals are traded in alignment with the broader market trend, potentially increasing their reliability.
For long signals (bullish divergence), the price (close) must be above the SMA (indicating an uptrend).
For short signals (bearish divergence), the price (close) must be below the SMA (indicating a downtrend).
Visualization: A blue line on the chart representing the SMA.
How to Trade with It (Potential Strategies)
The indicator aims to provide high-probability entry points by combining multiple confirming factors. Here's how you might interpret and trade the signals:
Identify Divergence: Look for the triangle signals on your chart (red for bearish, green for bullish).
Confirm Proximity to Volume Profile Levels: The signal itself confirms that the price is near a significant Volume Profile level (VAH, VAL, or POC). These are areas where price often reacts.
Bullish Signal (Green Triangle): This suggests buying momentum is returning after a price decline, especially when the price is near VAL or POC, which might act as support.
Bearish Signal (Red Triangle): This suggests selling momentum is increasing after a price rally, especially when the price is near VAH or POC, which might act as resistance.
Check Trend Alignment (SMA Filter):
For a long trade: You would ideally want to see a green triangle (bullish divergence) while the price is above the blue SMA line. This indicates a bullish divergence confirming a potential bounce within an existing uptrend.
For a short trade: You would ideally want to see a red triangle (bearish divergence) while the price is below the blue SMA line. This indicates a bearish divergence confirming a potential rejection within an existing downtrend.
Entry and Exit Considerations:
Entry: Consider entering a trade on the candle where the signal appears, or on the subsequent candle for confirmation.
Stop Loss: For a long trade, a logical stop-loss could be placed below the lowest point of the divergence, or below the VAL/POC if the signal occurred near it. For a short trade, above the highest point of the divergence or VAH/POC.
Take Profit: Targets could be set at the opposite Volume Profile level, previous swing highs/lows, or using a fixed risk-reward ratio.
Example Trading Scenario:
Long Trade: You see a green triangle (bullish divergence) printed on the chart. You notice the price is currently at the VAL (orange line). You check the blue SMA line and confirm that the price is above it (uptrend). This confluence of factors (bullish divergence, support at VAL, and uptrend) provides a strong potential long entry signal. You might enter, place your stop loss just below VAL, and target VAH or the next resistance level.
Short Trade: You see a red triangle (bearish divergence). The price is at the VAH (orange line). The price is also below the blue SMA line (downtrend). This suggests a potential short entry. You might enter, place your stop loss just above VAH, and target VAL or the next support level.
SL Hunting Detector📌 Step 1: Identify Liquidity Zones
The script plots high-liquidity zones (red) and low-liquidity zones (green).
These are areas where big players target stop-losses before reversing the price.
Example:
If price is near a red liquidity zone, expect a potential stop-loss hunt & reversal downward.
If price is near a green liquidity zone, expect a potential stop-loss hunt & reversal upward.
📌 Step 2: Watch for Stop-Loss Hunts (Fakeouts)
The indicator marks stop-loss hunts with red (bearish) or green (bullish) arrows.
When do stop-loss hunts occur?
✅ A long wick below support (with high volume) = Stop hunt before reversal upward.
✅ A long wick above resistance (with high volume) = Stop hunt before reversal downward.
Confirmation:
Volume must spike (volume > 1.5x the average volume).
ATR-based wicks must be longer than usual (showing a stop-hunt trap).
📌 Step 3: Enter a Trade After a Stop-Hunt
🔹 Bullish Trade (Buying a Dip)
If a green arrow appears (stop-hunt below support):
✅ Enter a long (buy) trade at or just above the wick’s recovery level.
✅ Stop-loss: Below the wick’s low (avoid getting hunted again).
✅ Take-profit: Next resistance level or mid-range of the liquidity zone.
🔹 Bearish Trade (Shorting a Fakeout)
If a red arrow appears (stop-hunt above resistance):
✅ Enter a short (sell) trade at or just below the wick’s rejection level.
✅ Stop-loss: Above the wick’s high (avoid getting stopped out).
✅ Take-profit: Next support level or mid-range of the liquidity zone.
📌 Step 4: Set Alerts & Automate
✅ The indicator triggers alerts when a stop-hunt is detected.
✅ You can set TradingView to notify you instantly when:
A bullish stop-hunt occurs → Look for long entry.
A bearish stop-hunt occurs → Look for short entry.
📌 Example Trade Setup
Example (BTC Long Trade on Stop-Hunt)
BTC is near $40,000 support (green liquidity zone).
A long wick drops to $39,800 with a green arrow (bullish stop-hunt signal).
Volume spikes, and price recovers quickly back above $40,000.
Trade entry: Buy at $40,050.
Stop-loss: Below wick ($39,700).
Take-profit: $41,500 (next resistance).
Result: BTC pumps, stop-loss remains safe, and trade profits.
🔥 Final Tips
Always wait for confirmation (don’t enter blindly on signals).
Use higher timeframes (15m, 1H, 4H) for better accuracy.
Combine with Order Flow tools (like Bookmap) to see real liquidity zones.
🚀 Now try it on TradingView! Let me know if you need adjustments. 📈🔥
Mean Reversion Cloud (Ornstein-Uhlenbeck) // AlgoFyreThe Mean Reversion Cloud (Ornstein-Uhlenbeck) indicator detects mean-reversion opportunities by applying the Ornstein-Uhlenbeck process. It calculates a dynamic mean using an Exponential Weighted Moving Average, surrounded by volatility bands, signaling potential buy/sell points when prices deviate.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
🔶 ORIGINALITY
🔸Adaptive Mean Calculation
🔸Volatility-Based Cloud
🔸Speed of Reversion (θ)
🔶 FUNCTIONALITY
🔸Dynamic Mean and Volatility Bands
🞘 How it works
🞘 How to calculate
🞘 Code extract
🔸Visualization via Table and Plotshapes
🞘 Table Overview
🞘 Plotshapes Explanation
🞘 Code extract
🔶 INSTRUCTIONS
🔸Step-by-Step Guidelines
🞘 Setting Up the Indicator
🞘 Understanding What to Look For on the Chart
🞘 Possible Entry Signals
🞘 Possible Take Profit Strategies
🞘 Possible Stop-Loss Levels
🞘 Additional Tips
🔸Customize settings
🔶 CONCLUSION
▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅
🔶 ORIGINALITY The Mean Reversion Cloud (Ornstein-Uhlenbeck) is a unique indicator that applies the Ornstein-Uhlenbeck stochastic process to identify mean-reverting behavior in asset prices. Unlike traditional moving average-based indicators, this model uses an Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) to calculate the long-term mean, dynamically adjusting to recent price movements while still considering all historical data. It also incorporates volatility bands, providing a "cloud" that visually highlights overbought or oversold conditions. By calculating the speed of mean reversion (θ) through the autocorrelation of log returns, this indicator offers traders a more nuanced and mathematically robust tool for identifying mean-reversion opportunities. These innovations make it especially useful for markets that exhibit range-bound characteristics, offering timely buy and sell signals based on statistical deviations from the mean.
🔸Adaptive Mean Calculation Traditional MA indicators use fixed lengths, which can lead to lagging signals or over-sensitivity in volatile markets. The Mean Reversion Cloud uses an Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA), which adapts to price movements by dynamically adjusting its calculation, offering a more responsive mean.
🔸Volatility-Based Cloud Unlike simple moving averages that only plot a single line, the Mean Reversion Cloud surrounds the dynamic mean with volatility bands. These bands, based on standard deviations, provide traders with a visual cue of when prices are statistically likely to revert, highlighting potential reversal zones.
🔸Speed of Reversion (θ) The indicator goes beyond price averages by calculating the speed at which the price reverts to the mean (θ), using the autocorrelation of log returns. This gives traders an additional tool for estimating the likelihood and timing of mean reversion, making the signals more reliable in practice.
🔶 FUNCTIONALITY The Mean Reversion Cloud (Ornstein-Uhlenbeck) indicator is designed to detect potential mean-reversion opportunities in asset prices by applying the Ornstein-Uhlenbeck stochastic process. It calculates a dynamic mean through the Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) and plots volatility bands based on the standard deviation of the asset's price over a specified period. These bands create a "cloud" that represents expected price fluctuations, helping traders to identify overbought or oversold conditions. By calculating the speed of reversion (θ) from the autocorrelation of log returns, the indicator offers a more refined way of assessing how quickly prices may revert to the mean. Additionally, the inclusion of volatility provides a comprehensive view of market conditions, allowing for more accurate buy and sell signals.
Let's dive into the details:
🔸Dynamic Mean and Volatility Bands The dynamic mean (μ) is calculated using the EWMA, giving more weight to recent prices but considering all historical data. This process closely resembles the Ornstein-Uhlenbeck (OU) process, which models the tendency of a stochastic variable (such as price) to revert to its mean over time. Volatility bands are plotted around the mean using standard deviation, forming the "cloud" that signals overbought or oversold conditions. The cloud adapts dynamically to price fluctuations and market volatility, making it a versatile tool for mean-reversion strategies. 🞘 How it works Step one: Calculate the dynamic mean (μ) The Ornstein-Uhlenbeck process describes how a variable, such as an asset's price, tends to revert to a long-term mean while subject to random fluctuations. In this indicator, the EWMA is used to compute the dynamic mean (μ), mimicking the mean-reverting behavior of the OU process. Use the EWMA formula to compute a weighted mean that adjusts to recent price movements. Assign exponentially decreasing weights to older data while giving more emphasis to current prices. Step two: Plot volatility bands Calculate the standard deviation of the price over a user-defined period to determine market volatility. Position the upper and lower bands around the mean by adding and subtracting a multiple of the standard deviation. 🞘 How to calculate Exponential Weighted Moving Average (EWMA)
The EWMA dynamically adjusts to recent price movements:
mu_t = lambda * mu_{t-1} + (1 - lambda) * P_t
Where mu_t is the mean at time t, lambda is the decay factor, and P_t is the price at time t. The higher the decay factor, the more weight is given to recent data.
Autocorrelation (ρ) and Standard Deviation (σ)
To measure mean reversion speed and volatility: rho = correlation(log(close), log(close ), length) Where rho is the autocorrelation of log returns over a specified period.
To calculate volatility:
sigma = stdev(close, length)
Where sigma is the standard deviation of the asset's closing price over a specified length.
Upper and Lower Bands
The upper and lower bands are calculated as follows:
upper_band = mu + (threshold * sigma)
lower_band = mu - (threshold * sigma)
Where threshold is a multiplier for the standard deviation, usually set to 2. These bands represent the range within which the price is expected to fluctuate, based on current volatility and the mean.
🞘 Code extract // Calculate Returns
returns = math.log(close / close )
// Calculate Long-Term Mean (μ) using EWMA over the entire dataset
var float ewma_mu = na // Initialize ewma_mu as 'na'
ewma_mu := na(ewma_mu ) ? close : decay_factor * ewma_mu + (1 - decay_factor) * close
mu = ewma_mu
// Calculate Autocorrelation at Lag 1
rho1 = ta.correlation(returns, returns , corr_length)
// Ensure rho1 is within valid range to avoid errors
rho1 := na(rho1) or rho1 <= 0 ? 0.0001 : rho1
// Calculate Speed of Mean Reversion (θ)
theta = -math.log(rho1)
// Calculate Volatility (σ)
sigma = ta.stdev(close, corr_length)
// Calculate Upper and Lower Bands
upper_band = mu + threshold * sigma
lower_band = mu - threshold * sigma
🔸Visualization via Table and Plotshapes
The table shows key statistics such as the current value of the dynamic mean (μ), the number of times the price has crossed the upper or lower bands, and the consecutive number of bars that the price has remained in an overbought or oversold state.
Plotshapes (diamonds) are used to signal buy and sell opportunities. A green diamond below the price suggests a buy signal when the price crosses below the lower band, and a red diamond above the price indicates a sell signal when the price crosses above the upper band.
The table and plotshapes provide a comprehensive visualization, combining both statistical and actionable information to aid decision-making.
🞘 Code extract // Reset consecutive_bars when price crosses the mean
var consecutive_bars = 0
if (close < mu and close >= mu) or (close > mu and close <= mu)
consecutive_bars := 0
else if math.abs(deviation) > 0
consecutive_bars := math.min(consecutive_bars + 1, dev_length)
transparency = math.max(0, math.min(100, 100 - (consecutive_bars * 100 / dev_length)))
🔶 INSTRUCTIONS
The Mean Reversion Cloud (Ornstein-Uhlenbeck) indicator can be set up by adding it to your TradingView chart and configuring parameters such as the decay factor, autocorrelation length, and volatility threshold to suit current market conditions. Look for price crossovers and deviations from the calculated mean for potential entry signals. Use the upper and lower bands as dynamic support/resistance levels for setting take profit and stop-loss orders. Combining this indicator with additional trend-following or momentum-based indicators can improve signal accuracy. Adjust settings for better mean-reversion detection and risk management.
🔸Step-by-Step Guidelines
🞘 Setting Up the Indicator
Adding the Indicator to the Chart:
Go to your TradingView chart.
Click on the "Indicators" button at the top.
Search for "Mean Reversion Cloud (Ornstein-Uhlenbeck)" in the indicators list.
Click on the indicator to add it to your chart.
Configuring the Indicator:
Open the indicator settings by clicking on the gear icon next to its name on the chart.
Decay Factor: Adjust the decay factor (λ) to control the responsiveness of the mean calculation. A higher value prioritizes recent data.
Autocorrelation Length: Set the autocorrelation length (θ) for calculating the speed of mean reversion. Longer lengths consider more historical data.
Threshold: Define the number of standard deviations for the upper and lower bands to determine how far price must deviate to trigger a signal.
Chart Setup:
Select the appropriate timeframe (e.g., 1-hour, daily) based on your trading strategy.
Consider using other indicators such as RSI or MACD to confirm buy and sell signals.
🞘 Understanding What to Look For on the Chart
Indicator Behavior:
Observe how the price interacts with the dynamic mean and volatility bands. The price staying within the bands suggests mean-reverting behavior, while crossing the bands signals potential entry points.
The indicator calculates overbought/oversold conditions based on deviation from the mean, highlighted by color-coded cloud areas on the chart.
Crossovers and Deviation:
Look for crossovers between the price and the mean (μ) or the bands. A bullish crossover occurs when the price crosses below the lower band, signaling a potential buying opportunity.
A bearish crossover occurs when the price crosses above the upper band, suggesting a potential sell signal.
Deviations from the mean indicate market extremes. A large deviation indicates that the price is far from the mean, suggesting a potential reversal.
Slope and Direction:
Pay attention to the slope of the mean (μ). A rising slope suggests bullish market conditions, while a declining slope signals a bearish market.
The steepness of the slope can indicate the strength of the mean-reversion trend.
🞘 Possible Entry Signals
Bullish Entry:
Crossover Entry: Enter a long position when the price crosses below the lower band with a positive deviation from the mean.
Confirmation Entry: Use additional indicators like RSI (above 50) or increasing volume to confirm the bullish signal.
Bearish Entry:
Crossover Entry: Enter a short position when the price crosses above the upper band with a negative deviation from the mean.
Confirmation Entry: Look for RSI (below 50) or decreasing volume to confirm the bearish signal.
Deviation Confirmation:
Enter trades when the deviation from the mean is significant, indicating that the price has strayed far from its expected value and is likely to revert.
🞘 Possible Take Profit Strategies
Static Take Profit Levels:
Set predefined take profit levels based on historical volatility, using the upper and lower bands as guides.
Place take profit orders near recent support/resistance levels, ensuring you're capitalizing on the mean-reversion behavior.
Trailing Stop Loss:
Use a trailing stop based on a percentage of the price deviation from the mean to lock in profits as the trend progresses.
Adjust the trailing stop dynamically along the calculated bands to protect profits as the price returns to the mean.
Deviation-Based Exits:
Exit when the deviation from the mean starts to decrease, signaling that the price is returning to its equilibrium.
🞘 Possible Stop-Loss Levels
Initial Stop Loss:
Place an initial stop loss outside the lower band (for long positions) or above the upper band (for short positions) to protect against excessive deviations.
Use a volatility-based buffer to avoid getting stopped out during normal price fluctuations.
Dynamic Stop Loss:
Move the stop loss closer to the mean as the price converges back towards equilibrium, reducing risk.
Adjust the stop loss dynamically along the bands to account for sudden market movements.
🞘 Additional Tips
Combine with Other Indicators:
Enhance your strategy by combining the Mean Reversion Cloud with momentum indicators like MACD, RSI, or Bollinger Bands to confirm market conditions.
Backtesting and Practice:
Backtest the indicator on historical data to understand how it performs in various market environments.
Practice using the indicator on a demo account before implementing it in live trading.
Market Awareness:
Keep an eye on market news and events that might cause extreme price movements. The indicator reacts to price data and might not account for news-driven events that can cause large deviations.
🔸Customize settings 🞘 Decay Factor (λ): Defines the weight assigned to recent price data in the calculation of the mean. A value closer to 1 places more emphasis on recent prices, while lower values create a smoother, more lagging mean.
🞘 Autocorrelation Length (θ): Sets the period for calculating the speed of mean reversion and volatility. Longer lengths capture more historical data, providing smoother calculations, while shorter lengths make the indicator more responsive.
🞘 Threshold (σ): Specifies the number of standard deviations used to create the upper and lower bands. Higher thresholds widen the bands, producing fewer signals, while lower thresholds tighten the bands for more frequent signals.
🞘 Max Gradient Length (γ): Determines the maximum number of consecutive bars for calculating the deviation gradient. This setting impacts the transparency of the plotted bands based on the length of deviation from the mean.
🔶 CONCLUSION
The Mean Reversion Cloud (Ornstein-Uhlenbeck) indicator offers a sophisticated approach to identifying mean-reversion opportunities by applying the Ornstein-Uhlenbeck stochastic process. This dynamic indicator calculates a responsive mean using an Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) and plots volatility-based bands to highlight overbought and oversold conditions. By incorporating advanced statistical measures like autocorrelation and standard deviation, traders can better assess market extremes and potential reversals. The indicator’s ability to adapt to price behavior makes it a versatile tool for traders focused on both short-term price deviations and longer-term mean-reversion strategies. With its unique blend of statistical rigor and visual clarity, the Mean Reversion Cloud provides an invaluable tool for understanding and capitalizing on market inefficiencies.
Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs (Hurst, CVaR, Fractal) // AlgoFyreThe Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs (Hurst, CVaR, Fractal) indicator adjusts moving averages based on market conditions, using Hurst Exponent for trend persistence, CVaR for extreme risk assessment, and Fractal Dimension for market complexity. It enhances trend detection and risk management across various timeframes.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
🔶 ORIGINALITY 🔸Adaptive Mechanisms
🔸Multi-Faceted Analysis
🔸Versatility Across Timeframes
🔸Multi-Scale Combination
🔶 FUNCTIONALITY 🔸Hurst Exponent (H)
🞘 How it works
🞘 How to calculate
🞘 Code extract
🔸Conditional Value at Risk (CVaR)
🞘 How it works
🞘 How to calculate
🞘 Code extract
🔸Fractal Dimension (FD)
🞘 How it works
🞘 How to calculate
🞘 Code extract
🔶 INSTRUCTIONS 🔸Step-by-Step Guidelines
🞘 Setting Up the Indicator
🞘 Understanding What to Look For on the Chart
🞘 Possible Entry Signals
🞘 Possible Take Profit Strategies
🞘 Possible Stop-Loss Levels
🞘 Additional Tips
🔸Customize settings
🔶 CONCLUSION
▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅
🔶 ORIGINALITY The Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs (Hurst, CVaR, Fractal) indicator stands out due to its unique approach of dynamically adjusting moving averages based on advanced statistical measures, making it highly responsive to varying market conditions. Unlike traditional moving averages that rely on static periods, this indicator adapts in real-time using three distinct adaptive methods: Hurst Exponent, CVaR, and Fractal Dimension.
🔸Adaptive Mechanisms
Traditional MA indicators use fixed lengths, which can lead to lagging signals or over-sensitivity in volatile markets. The Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs employ adaptive methods to adjust the MA length dynamically, providing a more accurate reflection of current market conditions.
🔸Multi-Faceted Analysis
By integrating Hurst Exponent, CVaR, and Fractal Dimension, the indicator offers a comprehensive market analysis. It captures different aspects of market behavior, including trend persistence, risk of extreme movements, and complexity, which are often missed by standard MAs.
🔸Versatility Across Timeframes
The indicator’s ability to switch between different adaptive methods based on market conditions allows traders to analyze short-term, medium-term, and long-term trends with enhanced precision.
🔸Multi-Scale Combination
Utilizing multiple adaptive MAs in combination provides a more nuanced view of the market, allowing traders to see how short, medium, and long-term trends interact. This layered approach helps in identifying the strength and consistency of trends across different scales, offering more reliable signals and aiding in complex decision-making processes. When combined, these MAs can also signal key market shifts when they converge or diverge, offering deeper insights than a single MA could provide.
🔶 FUNCTIONALITY The indicator adjusts moving averages based on a variety of different choosable adaptives. The Hurst Exponent to identify trend persistence or mean reversion, adapting to market conditions for both short-term and long-term trends. Using CVaR, it evaluates the risk of extreme price movements, ensuring the moving average is more conservative during high-risk periods, protecting against potential large losses. By incorporating the Fractal Dimension, the indicator adapts to market complexity, adjusting to varying levels of price roughness and volatility, which allows it to respond more accurately to different market structures and patterns.
Let's dive into the details:
🔸Hurst Exponent (H)
Measures the degree of trend persistence or mean reversion.
By using the Hurst Exponent, the indicator adjusts to capture the strength and duration of trends, helping traders to stay in profitable trades longer and avoid false reversals in ranging markets.
It enhances the detection of trends, making it suitable for both short-term scalping and identifying long-term trends.
🞘 How it works Rescaled Range (R/S) Analysis Calculate the mean of the closing prices over a set window.
Determine the deviation of each price from the mean.
Compute the cumulative sum of these deviations over the window.
Calculate the range (R) of the cumulative deviations (maximum minus minimum).
Compute the standard deviation (S) of the price series over the window.
Obtain the R/S ratio as R/S.
Linear Regression for Hurst Exponent Calculate the logarithm of multiple window sizes and their corresponding R/S values.
Use linear regression to determine the slope of the line fitting the log(R/S) against log(window size).
The slope of this line is an estimate of the Hurst Exponent.
🞘 How to calculate Range (R)
Calculate the maximum cumulative deviation:
R=max(sum(deviation))−min(sum(deviation))
Where deviation is the difference between each price and the mean.
Standard Deviation (S)
Calculate the standard deviation of the price series:
S=sqrt((1/(n−1))∗sum((Xi−mean)2))
Rescaled Range (R/S)
Divide the range by the standard deviation:
R/S=R/S
Hurst Exponent
Perform linear regression to estimate the slope of:
log(R/S) versus log(windowsize)
The slope of this line is the Hurst Exponent.
🞘 Code extract // Hurst Exponent
calc_hurst(source_, adaptive_window_) =>
window_sizes = array.from(adaptive_window_/10, adaptive_window_/5, adaptive_window_/2, adaptive_window_)
float hurst_exp = 0.5
// Calculate Hurst Exponent proxy
rs_list = array.new_float()
log_length_list = array.new_float()
for i = 0 to array.size(window_sizes) - 1
len = array.get(window_sizes, i)
// Ensure we have enough data
if bar_index >= len * 2
mean = adaptive_sma(source_, len)
dev = source_ - mean
// Calculate cumulative deviations over the window
cum_dev = ta.cum(dev) - ta.cum(dev )
r = ta.highest(cum_dev, len) - ta.lowest(cum_dev, len)
s = ta.stdev(source_, len)
if s != 0
rs = r / s
array.push(rs_list, math.log(rs))
array.push(log_length_list, math.log(len))
// Linear regression to estimate Hurst Exponent
n = array.size(log_length_list)
if n > 1
mean_x = array.sum(log_length_list) / n
mean_y = array.sum(rs_list) / n
sum_num = 0.0
sum_den = 0.0
for i = 0 to n - 1
x = array.get(log_length_list, i)
y = array.get(rs_list, i)
sum_num += (x - mean_x) * (y - mean_y)
sum_den += (x - mean_x) * (x - mean_x)
hurst_exp := sum_den != 0 ? sum_num / sum_den : 0.5
else
hurst_exp := 0.5 // Default to 0.5 if not enough data
hurst_exp
🔸Conditional Value at Risk (CVaR)
Assesses the risk of extreme losses by focusing on tail risk.
This method adjusts the moving average to account for market conditions where extreme price movements are likely, providing a more conservative approach during periods of high risk.
Traders benefit by better managing risk and avoiding major losses during volatile market conditions.
🞘 How it works Calculate Returns Determine the returns as the percentage change between consecutive closing prices over a specified window.
Percentile Calculation Identify the percentile threshold (e.g., the 5th percentile) for the worst returns in the dataset.
Average of Extreme Losses Calculate the average of all returns that are less than or equal to this percentile, representing the CVaR.
🞘 How to calculate Return Calculation
Calculate the return as the percentage change between consecutive prices:
Return = (Pt − Pt−1) / Pt−1
Where Pt is the price at time t.
Percentile Threshold
Identify the return value at the specified percentile (e.g., 5th percentile):
PercentileValue=percentile(returns,percentile_threshold)
CVaR Calculation
Compute the average of all returns below the percentile threshold:
CVaR = (1/n)∗sum(Return) for all Return≤PercentileValue
Where n is the total number of returns.
🞘 Code extract // Percentile
calc_percentile(data, percentile, window) =>
arr = array.new_float(0)
for i = 0 to window - 1
array.push(arr, data )
array.sort(arr)
index = math.floor(percentile / 100 * (window - 1))
array.get(arr, index)
// Conditional Value at Risk
calc_cvar(percentile_value, returns, window) =>
// Collect returns worse than the threshold
cvar_sum = 0.0
cvar_count = 0
for i = 0 to window - 1
ret = returns
if ret <= percentile_value
cvar_sum += ret
cvar_count += 1
// Calculate CVaR
cvar = cvar_count > 0 ? cvar_sum / cvar_count : 0.0
cvar
🔸Fractal Dimension (FD)
Evaluates market complexity and roughness by analyzing how price movements behave across different scales.
It enables the moving average to adapt based on the level of market noise or structure, allowing for smoother MAs during complex, volatile periods and more sensitive MAs during clear trends.
This adaptability is crucial for traders dealing with varying market states, improving the indicator's responsiveness to price changes.
🞘 How it works Total Distance (L) Calculation Sum the absolute price movements between consecutive periods over a given window.
Maximum Distance (D) Calculation Calculate the maximum displacement from the first to the last price point within the window.
Calculate Fractal Dimension Use Katz's method to estimate the Fractal Dimension as the ratio of the logarithms of L and D, divided by the logarithm of the number of steps (N).
🞘 How to calculate Total Distance (L)
Sum the absolute price changes over the window:
L=sum(abs(Pt−Pt−1)) for t from 2 to n
Where Pt is the price at time t.
Maximum Distance (D)
Find the maximum absolute displacement from the first to the last price in the window:
D=max(abs(Pn-P1))
Fractal Dimension Calculation
Use Katz's method to estimate fractal dimension:
FD=log(L/D)/log(N)
Where N is the number of steps in the window.
🞘 Code extract // Fractal Dimension
calc_fractal(source_, adaptive_window_) =>
// Calculate the total distance (L) traveled by the price
L = 0.0
for i = 1 to adaptive_window_
L += math.abs(source_ - source_ )
// Calculate the maximum distance between first and last price
D = math.max(math.abs(source_ - source_ ), 1e-10) // Avoid division by zero
// Calculate the number of steps (N)
N = adaptive_window_
// Estimate the Fractal Dimension using Katz's formula
math.log(L / D) / math.log(N)
🔶 INSTRUCTIONS The Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs indicator can be set up by adding it to your TradingView chart and configuring the adaptive method (Hurst, CVaR, or Fractal) to match current market conditions. Look for price crossovers and changes in the slope for potential entry signals. Set take profit and stop-loss levels based on dynamic changes in the moving average, and consider combining it with other indicators for confirmation. Adjust settings and use adaptive strategies for enhanced trend detection and risk management.
🔸Step-by-Step Guidelines 🞘 Setting Up the Indicator Adding the Indicator to the Chart: Go to your TradingView chart.
Click on the "Indicators" button at the top.
Search for "Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs (Hurst, CVaR, Fractal)" in the indicators list.
Click on the indicator to add it to your chart.
Configuring the Indicator: Open the indicator settings by clicking on the gear icon next to its name on the chart.
Adaptive Method: Choose between "Hurst," "CVaR," and "Fractal" depending on the market condition and your trading style.
Length: Set the base length for the moving average (e.g., 20, 50, or 100). This length will be adjusted dynamically based on the selected adaptive method.
Other Parameters: Adjust any other parameters as needed, such as window sizes or scaling factors specific to each adaptive method.
Chart Setup: Ensure you have an appropriate timeframe selected (e.g., 1-hour, 4-hour, daily) based on your trading strategy.
Consider using additional indicators like volume or RSI to confirm signals.
🞘 Understanding What to Look For on the Chart Indicator Behavior: Observe how the adaptive moving average (AMA) behaves compared to standard moving averages, e.g. notice how it might change direction with strength (Hurst).
For example, the AMA may become smoother during high market volatility (CVaR) or more responsive during strong trends (Hurst).
Crossovers: Look for crossovers between the price and the adaptive moving average.
A bullish crossover occurs when the price crosses above the AMA, suggesting a potential uptrend.
A bearish crossover occurs when the price crosses below the AMA, indicating a possible downtrend.
Slope and Direction: Pay attention to the slope of the AMA. A rising slope suggests a bullish trend, while a declining slope indicates a bearish trend.
The slope’s steepness can give you clues about the trend's strength.
🞘 Possible Entry Signals Bullish Entry: Crossover Entry: Enter a long position when the price crosses above the AMA and the AMA has a positive slope.
Confirmation Entry: Combine the crossover with other indicators like RSI (above 50) or increasing volume for confirmation.
Bearish Entry: Crossover Entry: Enter a short position when the price crosses below the AMA and the AMA has a negative slope.
Confirmation Entry: Use additional indicators like RSI (below 50) or decreasing volume to confirm the bearish trend.
Adaptive Method Confirmation: Hurst: Enter when the AMA indicates a strong trend (steeper slope). Suitable for trend-following strategies.
CVaR: Be cautious during high-risk periods. Enter only if confirmed by other indicators, as the AMA may become more conservative.
Fractal: Ideal for capturing reversals in complex markets. Look for crossovers in volatile markets.
🞘 Possible Take Profit Strategies Static Take Profit Levels: Set take profit levels based on predefined ratios (e.g., 1:2 or 1:3 risk-reward ratio).
Place take profit orders at recent swing highs (for long positions) or swing lows (for short positions).
Trailing Stop Loss: Use a trailing stop based on a percentage of the AMA value to lock in profits as the trend progresses.
Adjust the trailing stop dynamically to follow the AMA, allowing profits to run while protecting gains.
Adaptive Method Based Exits: Hurst: Exit when the AMA begins to flatten or turn in the opposite direction, signaling a potential trend reversal.
CVaR: Consider taking profits earlier during high-risk periods when the AMA suggests caution.
Fractal: Use the AMA to exit in complex markets when it smooths out, indicating reduced volatility.
🞘 Possible Stop-Loss Levels Initial Stop Loss: Place an initial stop loss below the AMA (for long positions) or above the AMA (for short positions) to protect against adverse movements.
Use a buffer (e.g., ATR value) to avoid being stopped out by normal price fluctuations.
Adaptive Stop Loss: Adjust the stop loss dynamically based on the AMA. Move the stop loss along the AMA as the trend progresses to minimize risk.
This helps in adapting to changing market conditions and avoiding premature exits.
Adaptive Method-Specific Stop Loss: Hurst: Use wider stops during trending markets to allow for minor pullbacks.
CVaR: Adjust stops in high-risk periods to avoid being stopped out prematurely during price fluctuations.
Fractal: Place stops at recent support/resistance levels in highly volatile markets.
🞘 Additional Tips Combine with Other Indicators: Enhance your strategy by combining the AMA with other technical indicators like MACD, RSI, or Bollinger Bands for better signal confirmation.
Backtesting and Practice: Backtest the indicator on historical data to understand how it performs in different market conditions.
Practice using the indicator on a demo account before applying it to live trading.
Market Awareness: Always be aware of market conditions and fundamental events that might impact price movements, as the AMA reacts to price action and may not account for sudden news-driven events.
🔸Customize settings 🞘 Time Override: Enables or disables the ability to override the default time frame for the moving averages. When enabled, you can specify a custom time frame for the calculations.
🞘 Time: Specifies the custom time frame to use when the Time Override setting is enabled.
🞘 Enable MA: Enables or disables the moving average. When disabled, MA will not be displayed on the chart.
🞘 Show Smoothing Line: Enables or disables the display of a smoothing line for the moving average. The smoothing line helps to reduce noise and provide a clearer trend.
🞘 Show as Horizontal Line: Displays the moving average as a horizontal line instead of a dynamic line that follows the price.
🞘 Source: Specifies the data source for the moving average calculation (e.g., close, open, high, low).
🞘 Length: Sets the period length for the moving average. A longer length will result in a smoother moving average, while a shorter length will make it more responsive to price changes.
🞘 Time: Specifies a custom time frame for the moving average, overriding the default time frame if Time Override is enabled.
🞘 Method: Selects the calculation method for the moving average (e.g., SMA, EMA, SMMA, WMA, VWMA).
🞘 Offset: Shifts the moving average forward or backward by the specified number of bars.
🞘 Color: Sets the color for the moving average line.
🞘 Adaptive Method: Selects the adaptive method to dynamically adjust the moving average based on market conditions (e.g., Hurst, CVaR, Fractal).
🞘 Window Size: Sets the window size for the adaptive method, determining how much historical data is used for the calculation.
🞘 CVaR Scaling Factor: Adjusts the influence of CVaR on the moving average length, controlling how much the length changes based on calculated risk.
🞘 CVaR Risk: Specifies the percentile cutoff for the worst-case returns used in the CVaR calculation to assess extreme losses.
🞘 Smoothing Method: Selects the method for smoothing the moving average (e.g., SMA, EMA, SMMA, WMA, VWMA).
🞘 Smoothing Length: Sets the period length for smoothing the moving average.
🞘 Fill Color to Smoothing Moving Average: Enables or disables the color fill between the moving average and its smoothing line.
🞘 Transparency: Sets the transparency level for the color fill between the moving average and its smoothing line.
🞘 Show Label: Enables or disables the display of a label for the moving average on the chart.
🞘 Show Label for Smoothing: Enables or disables the display of a label for the smoothing line of the moving average on the chart.
🔶 CONCLUSION The Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs indicator offers a sophisticated approach to trend analysis and risk management by dynamically adjusting moving averages based on Hurst Exponent, CVaR, and Fractal Dimension. This adaptability allows traders to respond more effectively to varying market conditions, capturing trends and managing risks with greater precision. By incorporating advanced statistical measures, the indicator goes beyond traditional moving averages, providing a nuanced and versatile tool for both short-term and long-term trading strategies. Its unique ability to reflect market complexity and extreme risks makes it an invaluable asset for traders seeking a deeper understanding of market dynamics.
[imba]lance algo🟩 INTRODUCTION
Hello, everyone!
Please take the time to review this description and source code to utilize this script to its fullest potential.
🟩 CONCEPTS
This is a trend indicator. The trend is the 0.5 fibonacci level for a certain period of time.
A trend change occurs when at least one candle closes above the level of 0.236 (for long) or below 0.786 (for short). Also it has massive amout of settings and features more about this below.
With good settings, the indicator works great on any market and any time frame!
A distinctive feature of this indicator is its backtest panel. With which you can dynamically view the results of setting up a strategy such as profit, what the deposit size is, etc.
Please note that the profit is indicated as a percentage of the initial deposit. It is also worth considering that all profit calculations are based on the risk % setting.
🟩 FEATURES
First, I want to show you what you see on the chart. And I’ll show you everything closer and in more detail.
1. Position
2. Statistic panel
3. Backtest panel
Indicator settings:
Let's go in order:
1. Strategies
This setting is responsible for loading saved strategies. There are only two preset settings, MANUAL and UNIVERSAL. If you choose any strategy other than MANUAL, then changing the settings for take profits, stop loss, sensitivity will not bring any results.
You can also save your customized strategies, this is discussed in a separate paragraph “🟩HOW TO SAVE A STRATEGY”
2. Sensitive
Responsible for the time period in bars to create Fibonacci levels
3. Start calculating date
This is the time to start backtesting strategies
4. Position group
Show checkbox - is responsible for displaying positions
Fill checkbox - is responsible for filling positions with background
Risk % - is responsible for what percentage of the deposit you are willing to lose if there is a stop loss
BE target - here you can choose when you reach which take profit you need to move your stop loss to breakeven
Initial deposit- starting deposit for profit calculation
5. Stoploss group
Fixed stoploss % checkbox - If choosed: stoploss will be calculated manually depending on the setting below( formula: entry_price * (1 - stoploss percent)) If NOT choosed: stoploss will be ( formula: fibonacci level(0.786/0.236) * (1 + stoploss percent))
6. Take profit group
This group of settings is responsible for how far from the entry point take profits will be and what % of the position to fix
7. RSI
Responsible for configuring the built-in RSI. Suitable bars will be highlighted with crosses above or below, depending on overbought/oversold
8. Infopanels group
Here I think everything is clear, you can hide or show information panels
9. Developer mode
If enabled, all events that occur will be shown, for example, reaching a take profit or stop loss with detailed information about the unfixed balance of the position
🟩 HOW TO USE
Very simple. All you need is to wait for the trend to change to long or short, you will immediately see a stop loss and four take profits, and you will also see prices. Like in this picture:
🟩 ALERTS
There are 3 types of alerts:
1. Long signal
2. Short signal
3. Any alert() function call - will be send to you json with these fields
{
"side": "LONG",
"entry": "64.454",
"tp1": "65.099",
"tp2": "65.743",
"tp3": "66.388",
"tp4": "67.032",
"winrate": "35.42%",
"strategy": "MANUAL",
"beTargetTrigger": "1",
"stop": "64.44"
}
🟩 HOW TO SAVE A STRATEGY
First, you need to make sure that the “MANUAL” strategy is selected in the strategy settings.
After this, you can start selecting parameters that will show the largest profit in the statistics panel.
I have highlighted what you need to pay attention to when choosing a strategy
Let's assume you have set up a strategy. The main question is how to preserve it?
Let’s say the strategy turned out with the following parameters:
Next we need to find this section of code:
// STRATS
selector(string strategy_name) =>
strategy_settings = Strategy_settings.new()
switch strategy_name
"MANUAL" =>
strategy_settings.sensitivity := 18
strategy_settings.risk_percent := 1
strategy_settings.break_even_target := "1"
strategy_settings.tp1_percent := 1
strategy_settings.tp1_percent_fix := 40
strategy_settings.tp2_percent := 2
strategy_settings.tp2_percent_fix := 30
strategy_settings.tp3_percent := 3
strategy_settings.tp3_percent_fix := 20
strategy_settings.tp4_percent := 4
strategy_settings.tp4_percent_fix := 10
strategy_settings.fixed_stop := false
strategy_settings.sl_percent := 0.0
"UNIVERSAL" =>
strategy_settings.sensitivity := 20
strategy_settings.risk_percent := 1
strategy_settings.break_even_target := "1"
strategy_settings.tp1_percent := 1
strategy_settings.tp1_percent_fix := 40
strategy_settings.tp2_percent := 2
strategy_settings.tp2_percent_fix := 30
strategy_settings.tp3_percent := 3
strategy_settings.tp3_percent_fix := 20
strategy_settings.tp4_percent := 4
strategy_settings.tp4_percent_fix := 10
strategy_settings.fixed_stop := false
strategy_settings.sl_percent := 0.0
// "NEW STRATEGY" =>
// strategy_settings.sensitivity := 20
// strategy_settings.risk_percent := 1
// strategy_settings.break_even_target := "1"
// strategy_settings.tp1_percent := 1
// strategy_settings.tp1_percent_fix := 40
// strategy_settings.tp2_percent := 2
// strategy_settings.tp2_percent_fix := 30
// strategy_settings.tp3_percent := 3
// strategy_settings.tp3_percent_fix := 20
// strategy_settings.tp4_percent := 4
// strategy_settings.tp4_percent_fix := 10
// strategy_settings.fixed_stop := false
// strategy_settings.sl_percent := 0.0
strategy_settings
// STRATS
Let's uncomment on the latest strategy called "NEW STRATEGY" rename it to "SOL 5m" and change the sensitivity:
// STRATS
selector(string strategy_name) =>
strategy_settings = Strategy_settings.new()
switch strategy_name
"MANUAL" =>
strategy_settings.sensitivity := 18
strategy_settings.risk_percent := 1
strategy_settings.break_even_target := "1"
strategy_settings.tp1_percent := 1
strategy_settings.tp1_percent_fix := 40
strategy_settings.tp2_percent := 2
strategy_settings.tp2_percent_fix := 30
strategy_settings.tp3_percent := 3
strategy_settings.tp3_percent_fix := 20
strategy_settings.tp4_percent := 4
strategy_settings.tp4_percent_fix := 10
strategy_settings.fixed_stop := false
strategy_settings.sl_percent := 0.0
"UNIVERSAL" =>
strategy_settings.sensitivity := 20
strategy_settings.risk_percent := 1
strategy_settings.break_even_target := "1"
strategy_settings.tp1_percent := 1
strategy_settings.tp1_percent_fix := 40
strategy_settings.tp2_percent := 2
strategy_settings.tp2_percent_fix := 30
strategy_settings.tp3_percent := 3
strategy_settings.tp3_percent_fix := 20
strategy_settings.tp4_percent := 4
strategy_settings.tp4_percent_fix := 10
strategy_settings.fixed_stop := false
strategy_settings.sl_percent := 0.0
"SOL 5m" =>
strategy_settings.sensitivity := 15
strategy_settings.risk_percent := 1
strategy_settings.break_even_target := "1"
strategy_settings.tp1_percent := 1
strategy_settings.tp1_percent_fix := 40
strategy_settings.tp2_percent := 2
strategy_settings.tp2_percent_fix := 30
strategy_settings.tp3_percent := 3
strategy_settings.tp3_percent_fix := 20
strategy_settings.tp4_percent := 4
strategy_settings.tp4_percent_fix := 10
strategy_settings.fixed_stop := false
strategy_settings.sl_percent := 0.0
strategy_settings
// STRATS
Now let's find this code:
strategy_input = input.string(title = "STRATEGY", options = , defval = "MANUAL", tooltip = "EN:\nTo manually configure the strategy, select MANUAL otherwise, changing the settings won't have any effect\nRU:\nЧтобы настроить стратегию вручную, выберите MANUAL в противном случае изменение настроек не будет иметь никакого эффекта")
And let's add our new strategy there, it turned out like this:
strategy_input = input.string(title = "STRATEGY", options = , defval = "MANUAL", tooltip = "EN:\nTo manually configure the strategy, select MANUAL otherwise, changing the settings won't have any effect\nRU:\nЧтобы настроить стратегию вручную, выберите MANUAL в противном случае изменение настроек не будет иметь никакого эффекта")
That's all. Our new strategy is now saved! It's simple! Now we can select it in the list of strategies:
Price Pivots for NASDQ 100 StocksPrice Pivots for NASDQ 100 Stocks
What is this Indicator?
• This indicator calculates the price range a Stock can move in a Day.
Advantages of this Indicator
• This is a Leading indicator, not Dynamic or Repaint.
• Helps to identify the tight range of price movement.
• Can easily identify the Options strike price.
• Develops a discipline in placing Targets.
Disadvantages of this Indicator
• The indicator is specifically made for NASDQ 100 stocks. The levels won't work for other stocks.
• The indicator shows nothing for other indexes and stocks other than above mentioned.
• The data need to be entered manually.
Who to use?
Highly beneficial for Day Traders, it can be used for Swing and Positions as well.
What timeframe to use?
• Any timeframe.
• The highlighted levels in Red and Green will not show correct levels in 1 minute timeframe.
• 5min is recommended for Day Traders.
When to use?
• Wait for proper swing to form.
• Recommended to avoid 1st 1 hour or market open, that is 9.15am to 10.15 or 10.30am.
• Within this time a proper swing will be formed.
What are the Lines?
• The concept is the price will move from one pivot to another.
• Entry and Exit can be these levels as Reversal or Retracement.
Gray Lines:
• Every lines with price labels are the Strike Prices in the Option Chain.
• Price moves from 1 Strike Price level to another.
• The dashed lines are average levels of 2 Strike Prices.
Red & Green Lines:
• The Red and Green Lines will appear only after the first 1 hour.
• The levels are calculated based on the 1st 1 hour.
• Red Lines are important Resistance levels, these are strong Bearish reversal points. It is also a breakout level, this need to be figured out from the past levels, trend, percentage change and consolidation.
• Green Lines are important Support levels, these are strong Bullish reversal points. It is also a breakdown level, this need to be figured out from the past levels, trend, percentage change and consolidation.
What are the Labels?
• First Number: Price of that level.
• Numbers in (): Percentage change and Change of price from LTP (Last Traded Price) to that Level.
How to use?
Entry:
• Enter when price is closer to the Red or Green lines.
• Enter after considering previous Swing and Trend.
• Note the 50% of previous Swing.
• Enter Short when price reverse from each level.
• If 50% of swing and the pivot level is closer it can be a good entry.
Exit:
• Use the logic of Entry, each level can be a target.
• Exit when price is closer to the Red or Green lines.
Indicator Menu
Source
• Custom: Enter the price manually after choosing the Source as Custom to show the Pivots at that price.
• LTP: Pivot is calculated based on Last Traded Price.
• Day Open: Pivot is calculated based on current day opening price.
• PD Close: Pivot is calculated based on previous day closing price.
• PD HL2: Pivot is calculated based on previous day average of High and Low.
• PD HLC3: Pivot is calculated based on previous day average of High, Low and Close.
"Time (Vertical Lines)"
• This is a marker of every 1 hour.
• Usually major price movement happen between previous day last 1 hour to today first 1 hour.
• Two swings can happen between first 2 hour of current day.
• At the end of the day last 1 hour another important movement will happen.
• Usually rest of the time won't show any interesting movement.
To the Users
• Certain symbols may show the levels as a single line. For such symbols choose a different Source or Timeframe from the indicator menu.
• Please inform if any of the Symbol's price levels don't react to the pivots , include the Symbol a well.
• Also inform if you notice any wrong values, errors or abnormal behavior in the indicator.
• Feel free to suggest or adding new features and options.
General Tips
• It is good if Stock trend is same as that of Index trend.
• Lots of indicators creates lots of confusion.
• Keep the chart simple and clean.
• Buy Low and Sell High.
• Master averages or 50%.
• Previous Swing High and Swing Low are crucial.
Important Note
• Currently the levels are in testing stage.
• Eventually the levels of certain symbols will be corrected after each update and test.
Price Pivots for NSE Index & F&O StocksPrice Pivots for NSE Index & F&O Stocks
What is this Indicator?
• This indicator calculates the price range a Stock or Index can move in a Day, Week or Month.
Advantages of this Indicator
• This is a Leading indicator, not Dynamic or Repaint.
• Helps to identify the tight range of price movement.
• Can easily identify the Options strike price.
• The levels are more reliable and authentic than Gann Square of 9 Levels.
• Develops a discipline in placing Targets.
Disadvantages of this Indicator
• The indicator is specifically made for National Stock Exchange of India (NSE) listed index and stocks.
• The indicator is calculated only for index NIFTY, BANKNIFTY, FINNIFTY, MIDCPNIFTY and Stocks listed in Futures and Options.
• The indicator shows nothing for other indexes and stocks other than above mentioned.
• The data need to be entered manually.
• The data need to be updated manually when the F&O listed stocks are updated.
Who to use?
Highly beneficial for Day Traders, it can be used for Swing and Positions as well.
What timeframe to use?
• Any timeframe.
• The highlighted levels in Red and Green will not show correct levels in 1 minute timeframe.
• 5min is recommended for Day Traders.
When to use?
• Wait for proper swing to form.
• Recommended to avoid 1st 1 hour or market open, that is 9.15am to 10.15 or 10.30am.
• Within this time a proper swing will be formed.
How to use?
Entry
• Enter when the Price reach closer to the Blue line.
• Enter Long when the Price takes a pullback or breakout at the Red lines.
Exit
• Exit position when the Price reach closer to the Red lines in Long positions.
What are the Lines?
Gray Lines:
• Every lines with price labels are the Strike Prices in the Option Chain from NSE website.
• Price moves from 1 Strike Price level to another.
• The dashed lines are average levels of 2 Strike Prices.
Red & Green Lines:
• The Red and Green Lines will appear only after the first 1 hour.
• The levels are calculated based on the 1st 1 hour.
• Red Lines are important Resistance levels, these are strong Bearish reversal points. It is also a breakout level, this need to be figured out from the past levels, trend, percentage change and consolidation.
• Green Lines are important Support levels, these are strong Bullish reversal points. It is also a breakdown level, this need to be figured out from the past levels, trend, percentage change and consolidation.
What are the Labels?
• First Number: Price of that level.
• Numbers in (): Percentage change and Change of price from LTP(Last Traded Price) to that Level.
How to use?
Entry:
• Enter when price is closer to the Red or Green lines.
• Enter after considering previous Swing and Trend.
• Note the 50% of previous Swing.
• Enter Short when price reverse from each level.
• If 50% of swing and the pivot level is closer it can be a good entry.
Exit:
• Use the logic of Entry, each level can be a target.
• Exit when price is closer to the Red or Green lines.
Indicator Menu
Source
• Custom: Enter the price manually after choosing the Source as Custom to show the Pivots at that price.
• LTP: Pivot is calculated based on Last Traded Price.
• Day Open: Pivot is calculated based on current day opening price.
• PD Close: Pivot is calculated based on previous day closing price.
• PD HL2: Pivot is calculated based on previous day average of High and Low.
• PD HLC3: Pivot is calculated based on previous day average of High, Low and Close.
"Time (IST) (Vertical)"
• This is a marker of every 1 hour.
• Usually major price movement happen between previous day last 1 hour (2:15 pm) to today first 1 hour (10:15 pm).
• Two swings can happen between first 2 hour of current day.
• At the end of the day last 1 hour from 2.15 pm another important movement will happen.
• Usually rest of the time won't show any interesting movement.
To the Users
• Certain symbols may show the levels as a single line. For such symbols choose a different Source or Timeframe from the indicator menu.
• Please inform if any of the Symbol's price levels don't react to the pivots, include the Symbol a well.
• Also inform if you notice any wrong values, errors or abnormal behavior in the indicator.
• Feel free to suggest or adding new features and options.
General Tips
• It is good if Stock trend is same as that of NIFTY trend.
• Lots of indicators creates lots of confusion.
• Keep the chart simple and clean.
• Buy Low and Sell High.
• Master averages or 50%.
• Previous Swing High and Swing Low are crucial.
Auto Harmonic Pattern - PRO [AlgoScopes] V1Harmonic Patterns is a powerful tool for identifying potential reversal areas in the financial markets. Auto Harmonic Pattern Pro it is based on the work of Scott Carney, a renowned trader and author who developed the concept of harmonic patterns.
Scott Carney's extensive research and contributions have greatly enhanced our understanding of market patterns and their application in trading. Auto Harmonic Pattern Pro is adapted from Scott Carney's original work on harmonic patterns, as well as other sources that have contributed to the recognition and understanding of harmonic patterns beyond Carney's initial research.
Auto Harmonic Pattern Pro offers traders a valuable tool for identifying potential reversal zones in the markets. We would like to express our gratitude to Scott Carney for his pioneering work in developing harmonic patterns, as well as to the various contributors and sources that have expanded our knowledge and understanding of harmonic patterns beyond Carney's original research.
Remember to always practice proper risk management and combine the indicator's signals with other technical analysis tools for a comprehensive trading approach.
For more information about Scott Carney and his work on harmonic patterns, you can find additional resources on his official website.
💠 ABOUT THE SCRIPT
💎 DISPLAY
⚬ The following things are displayed by default on the chart
🔸 Live patterns in trade with XABCD labels. (filled major triangle)
🔸 Entry, Stop and Target levels on chart for all live patterns. Target level are dimmed along with reducing size when they become irrelevant
🔸 Open Trades Stat table - Show patterns ID, patterns name, status for patterns, size&age, Entry, I.Stop, T.Stop and Targets (TP1 - TP4).
⚬ Highlighted present stop (and/or trailing stop if is enabled) and next target
⚬ When there are multiple patterns on chart, Entry, Stop, and Target labels & lines & PRZ* boxes are created with specific distance from each other to provide clarity to the users
*(potential reversal zone)
⬜ SETTINGS
⚬ Let's talk about some of the settings. Almost all of these settings have already been optimized and tested over time, but for some tickers it might be better to do a new test.
💎 ZIGZAG
🔸 Length - Default is set to 8. User can change settings but it is a good idea to keep with fibonacci (5, 13, 21, 34, 55 etc)
🔸 Depth - This setting is for how many pivots indicator scan to find harmonic pattern. By default it is set as 200
🔸 Recursive Algorithm - Enabled will use recursive instead standard zigzag
💎 HARMONIC PATTERN SETTINGS
🔸 Trade Direction - Default is set to show all (bearish and bullish) harmonic patterns. Can be filtered to bullish or bearish direction.
🔸 Error Percent - Default is 8. That is error percent tolerance from perfect pattern ratio.
🔸 Maximum patterns - Maximum patterns allowed on chart at any time
⚬ When it reaches the maximum patterns and the indicator finds a new one, the old patterns will be removed
- (important for algo traders because alerts for those removed patterns will no longer be a trigger)
🔸 Pattern size
⚬ Without filter will show all patterns (regardless of size)
⚬ Show only patterns for user preference size (no more two patterns because is smaller of 280 bars)
🔸 External Filter - It can be used to filter harmonic patterns. You can build your own custom trend based scripts and use it with AHP to filter trades.
⚬ The structure of the external script must be
1 for Long/Bullish patterns
-1 for Short/Bearish patterns
2 for all (Long and Short patterns)
0 Trade is not allowed
🔸 Filter Pattern Starts
⚬ When Filter starts is enabled pattern will start for logical pivot (see example)
⚬ Disabled filter will show more patterns (still can be very profitable)
💎 STOP & ENTRY & TRAILING STOP
🔸 Trail Entry Price - If Entry is still not reached and the price is still in PRZ zone, at the new high/low will adjust Entry.
⚬ Open Stats table will show the first Entry (when patterns were found) as well as the last corrected Entry (when patterns reached Entry level).
⚬ Disable this option Entry will remain at the level when patterns are found.
🔸 Enable Targets (awaiting entry) - enabled will show potential Targets for "awaiting entry" patterns (not active patterns because they have not yet reached Entry).
⚬ The Open stats table will show all other information, risk %, R:R etc).
⚬ Risky trade but with very good R:R (not recommended for inexperienced traders, very high risk of trading hitting Stop before reaching a Target)
🔸 Stop Distance - By default is set to 5. That is percent from the last low/high when the pattern reaches Entry. Stop trail from price till pattern reached Entry level.
🔸 Entry Distance - By default is set to 16. Same for SL that is percent distance from live price. You can increase/decrease percent but remember you have to give space between live price and the entry.
⚬ If entry is close to price, trade will become active too quickly
⚬ Remember if you change Stop Distance as well as Entry Distance to check Risk : Reward (recommended R:R for the first target is about 1:1)
🔸 Trailing Type - Options for trailing type, Continuous, Stepped, Breakeven and Disabled.
⚬ Continuous - When the price reaches "Trailing Active" (initial level for activating the trailing stop), T.Stop will start from Entry or Initial Stop (based on "Trailing Starts") and follow the price by Distance or Percent (based on "Trailing by").
- example one (trailing starts from Initial Stop when TP1 reached by distance/price on picture 1 and by percent on picture 2)
- example two (trailing starts from Entry when TP1 reached by distance/price on picture 1 and by percent on picture 2)
⚬ Stepped - when price reaches Trailing Active (initial level for activating the trailing stop), T.Stop will move to the previous level
- (If "Trailing Active" is set to Target2, then T.Stop will move to Target1 when price reached TP2)
⚬ Breakeven - when price reaches Trailing Active (initial level for activating the trailing stop), T.Stop will move to Entry and stay there the entire time for that harmonic trade
- (till reached all targets or reached T.Stop)
🔸 Trailing Active - When will the Trailing Stop be activated ("Trailing Type" must be enabled)
🔸 Trailing by - Distance or Percent
⚬ Distance - T.Stop will follow live price by initial distance
⚬ Percent - T.Stop will follow live price by initial percent
🔸 Trailing Starts - Entry or Initial Stop
⚬ Entry - T.Stop will start trailing from Entry level
⚬ I.Stop - T.Stop will start trailing from initial Stop level
- (Check Continuous picture for information)
💎 TARGET
🔸 Base - The level from which the calculation for Targets is made.
🔸 Target 1/Target 4 dropdown - Targets are set by default and set in the dropdown most often used for those targets.
🔸 Target 1/Target 4 custom - If the desired ratio is not in the dropdown, then it is possible to manually enter the desired ratio.
⚬ (If you want to change some of the targets, maybe to confluence with support/resistance)
💎 PATTERNS
🔸 Harmonic Patterns Type
⚬ Enable/Disable harmonic patterns by Type of patterns (for Classic and Anti patterns)
⚬ By default all patterns are enabled (for standard patterns). Users can control and select/deselect all Classic, Anti or Non Standard patterns but also disable individual patterns.
⚬ For some patterns (like Shark and Navarro 200) we change PRZ or place in different Type groups. That is just cosmetic things.
🔸 Classic - This includes all and most popular Harmonic Patterns.
⚬ Gartley (Type I)
⚬ Bat (Type I)
⚬ Butterfly (Type II)
⚬ Crab (Type II)
⚬ Deep Crab (Type II)
⚬ Cypher (Type II)
⚬ Shark (Type III)
⚬ Nenstar (Type IV)
🔸 Anti Patterns
⚬ Anti Nenstar (Type I)
⚬ Anti Shark (Type II)
⚬ Anti Cypher (Type II)
⚬ Anti Crab (Type II)
⚬ Anti Butterfly (Type III)
⚬ Anti Bat (Type IV)
⚬ Anti Gartley (Type IV)
⚬ Navarro 200 (Type IV)
🔸 Non Standard -
⚬ White Swan
⚬ Black Swan
⚬ 3 Drive
⚬ Anti 3 Drive
⚬ Wolfe
⚬ Snorm
⚬ 121 Pattern
⚬ 5-0 Pattern
⚬ Sea Pony
⚬ Leonardo
💎 PATTERN DISPLAY OPTION
🔸 Pattern Lines Size - thickness for harmonic patterns
🔸 Pattern Lines Type - type for harmonic pattern lines (solid, dotted, dashed)
🔸 Fill XAB/BCD - major harmonic triangle
🔸 Fill ABC/XBD - minor harmonic triangle
🔸 Enable XABCD Label - labels for harmonic pattern
🔸 XABCD Label Size - size for harmonic xabcd labels
🔸 Enable Ratio Label & Line - lines and labels that connect harmonic patterns levels and that show the patterns ratio
🔸 Ratio Label Size - ratio labels size
⚬ Lines for pattern ratio are set by default dashed and can’t be changed.
💎 PRZ & ENTRY | STOP | TARGET SETTINGS
🔸 Entry & Stop & Target Labels - by default is set to small (opt small & normal)
🔸 Entry & Stop & Target Lines - by default is set to show lines & labels & price (opt lines & labels & price or lines & labels or disable all)
🔸 PRZ Box size - size in bars for PRZ box
⚬ Added option when it is not readable on chart pattern names or entry/stop/targets offset
⚬ Maximum (last pattern) can be drawn up to 500 bars in future or you will get error for script (use this option only when you need)
🔸 PRZ Box Type of Spacing - distance between PRZ boxes. "Auto" will make the maximum distance when there are more than 3 patterns on the chart for better visibility
- (the maximum can be projected up to 500 bars in the future)
🔸 PRZ Box Manual Spacing - manual distance between PRZ boxes if is “PRZ Box Type of Spacing” set to manual
💎 STATS AND DISPLAY
⚬ These settings can be used to manage display of open and close statistic tables
🔸 Open Trades - By default is enabled and set to the top right position.
🔸 Closed Trades - By default is disabled and set to bottom left position.
⚬ The size of the table can be changed (by default it is set to small)
🔸 Enable Tool Tip for Table - can be enabled/disabled. Shows important information for each section related to Open or Closed tables.
⚬ Recommended enabled until everything related to tables is understood, and later disabled (it starts to get annoying when you accidentally cross the tables with the mouse and tooltip box pop up)
💎 OPEN STATS
🔸 Percentage - show percentage for Targets and Stops
🔸 Risk/Reward - show patterns risk to reward for each Targets
🔸 Size/Age - show patterns size (from X to D in bars) and patterns age (distance in bars when patterns “In Trade”)
🔸 Live % & R:R - enabled will show live % and R:R if you take trade in that moment
💎 CLOSED STATS
🔸 Percentage - show stats by percent instead of numbers
🔸 Display Mode - Closed trade table have three display option, Compact, Detailed and Selective
⚬ Compact - show stats for Long/Bullish and Short/Bearish patterns
⚬ Selective - show stats just for active patterns
⚬ Detailed - show stats for each enabled patterns
- All stats is for “Backtest Bars” if enabled.
- I removed some things from the previous indicator (R:R as well as trailing R:R and win rate) because I think they are not relevant in Closed Table for trade or for statistics (Open Table have that)
💎 PATTERN | CHART COLOR THEME
⚬ By default it is set to Light color theme. Color theme will affect pattern lines, XABCD labels, ratio lines and label, entry/sl/targets labels and text in the open statistics table.
🔸 Dark Theme / Light Theme - Users can change any default individual color for dark or light theme (transparency too).
⚬ Light/Dark Theme suits dark or light chart background or user can change all color to preferred trade style.
⚬ Users have extra control to change all color to preferred trade style.
💎 ALERTS
⚬ Alerts - These settings help users to choose the type of alerts they want to receive.
🔸 New - New Harmonic Pattern is identified
🔸 Entry - Harmonic Pattern reached Entry level
🔸 Target 1/Target4 - Alert when patterns reached on of Target levels
🔸 Closure - Harmonic Pattern trade is closed. Reached all Targets or Stop or Trailing Stop (if is enabled)
🔸 Long & Short placeholders - Enabled will change for alerts Bullish/Bearish text for Long/Short text
⚬ example of custom alerts with some placeholders
💎 BACKTEST WINDOW
🔸 Backtest bars - Enabled will scan patterns for that bar range (default is set to 5000)
🔷 TOOL TIP
⚬ In setting you have help from tooltip to give you almost all this information for easy understanding. Hover mouse above tool tip and windows with info will appear.
⚬ On the chart, tool tip is added for each individual Harmonic pattern to show extra information (pattern ratio, type of harmonic and where often that pattern appears in Elliott wave fractal)
⚬ Tooltip for tables will also provide all the information related to Open and Closed tables. Disabled tooltip for tables will hide all information, but the tooltip for patterns will still remain.
🔴 Possible Errors
⚬ If a mistake is made in the settings and, for example, TP2 is set to 0.618 ratio and TP3 is changed to 0.5 ratio
- (the larger target is set to a smaller ratio than the smaller target), a red text will appear over most charts to indicate the error.
⚬ If Trailing Type is enabled and "Trailing Active" and "Trailing Starts" are set to the same level (Entry), a red text will appear on the charts to indicate an error
- (change "Trailing Active" to a higher level, TP1, or lower "Trailing Starts " to "I.Start")
